MOTOROLA MC68HC908JK3E Microcontroller Datasheet

MC68HC908JL3E
MC68HC908JK3E
MC68HC908JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E
MC68HRC908JK3E
MC68HRC908JK1E
MC68HLC908JL3E
MC68HLC908JK3E
MC68HLC908JK1E
M68HC08
Technical Data
Microcontrollers
MC68HC908JL3E/D
Rev. 2, 12/2002
MOTOROLA.COM/SEMICONDUCTORS
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Technical Data
Motorola reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products
herein. Motorola makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the
suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Motorola assume any
liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically
disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental
damages. “Typical” parameters which may be provided in Motorola data sheets and/or
specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may
vary over time. All operating parameters, including “Typicals” must be validated for
each customer application by customer's technical experts. Motorola does not convey
any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Motorola products are not
designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for
surgical implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or sustain life,
or for any other application in which the failure of the Motorola product could create a
situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use
Motorola products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall
indemnify and hold Motorola and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and
distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and
reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal
injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim
alleges that Motorola was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part.
Motorola, Inc. is an Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer.
Motorola and the Stylized M logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.
digital dna is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
© Motorola, Inc., 2002
Technical Data
3
Revision History
To provide the most up-to-date information, the revision of our
documents on the World Wide Web will be the most current. Your printed
copy may be an earlier revision. To verify you have the latest information
available, refer to:
http://motorola.com/semiconductors
The following revision history table summarizes changes contained in
this document. For your convenience, the page number designators
have been linked to the appropriate location.
Revision History
Date
Dec 2002
May 2002
Technical Data
4
Revision
Level
2
1
Page
Number(s)
Description
Added appendix A for low-volt devices.
217–224
Updated Monitor Mode Circuit (Figure 9-1) and Monitor Mode
Entry Requirements and Options (Table 9-1) in Monitor ROM
section.
109, 110
First general release.
—
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
List of Sections
Section 1. General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Section 2. Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Section 3. Random-Access Memory (RAM) . . . . . . . . . . 41
Section 4. FLASH Memory (FLASH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG) . . . . . . . . . 53
Section 6. Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM) . . . . . . . . . 77
Section 8. Oscillator (OSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Section 9. Monitor ROM (MON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Section 10. Timer Interface Module (TIM) . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Section 11. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) . . . . . . 143
Section 12. Input/Output (I/O) Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Section 13. External Interrupt (IRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Section 14. Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI). . . . . . . . 171
Section 15. Computer Operating Properly (COP) . . . . 179
Section 16. Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Section 17. Break Module (BREAK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Section 18. Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Section 19. Mechanical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Section 20. Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Appendix A. MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E. . . . . . . . . 217
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
List of Sections
5
List of Sections
Technical Data
6
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
List of Sections
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Table of Contents
Section 1. General Description
1.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4
MCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.5
Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.6
Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Section 2. Memory Map
2.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3
I/O Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.4
Monitor ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Section 3. Random-Access Memory (RAM)
3.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Section 4. FLASH Memory (FLASH)
4.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Table of Contents
7
Table of Contents
4.4
FLASH Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
4.5
FLASH Page Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.6
FLASH Mass Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.7
FLASH Program Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.8
FLASH Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.9
FLASH Block Protect Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG)
5.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Section 6. Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.4
CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.4.1
Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
6.4.2
Index Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.4.3
Stack Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.4.4
Program Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.4.5
Condition Code Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
6.5
Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
6.6
Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
6.6.1
Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.6.2
Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.7
CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.8
Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.9
Opcode Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Technical Data
8
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Table of Contents
MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM)
7.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.3
SIM Bus Clock Control and Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.3.1
Bus Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.3.2
Clock Start-Up from POR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.3.3
Clocks in Stop Mode and Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.4
Reset and System Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.4.1
External Pin Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.4.2
Active Resets from Internal Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.4.2.1
Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.4.2.2
Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset. . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.4.2.3
Illegal Opcode Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.4.2.4
Illegal Address Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.4.2.5
LVI Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
7.5
SIM Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.5.1
SIM Counter During Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.5.2
SIM Counter During Stop Mode Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.5.3
SIM Counter and Reset States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
7.6
Exception Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.6.1
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.6.1.1
Hardware Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.6.1.2
SWI Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.6.2
Interrupt Status Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.6.2.1
Interrupt Status Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.6.2.2
Interrupt Status Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.6.2.3
Interrupt Status Register 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.6.3
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.6.4
Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
7.6.5
Status Flag Protection in Break Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.7
Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
7.7.1
Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.7.2
Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.8
SIM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Table of Contents
9
Table of Contents
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
Break Status Register (BSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Reset Status Register (RSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Break Flag Control Register (BFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Section 8. Oscillator (OSC)
8.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.3
X-tal Oscillator (MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E). . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.4
RC Oscillator (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E) . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.5
I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.1
Crystal Amplifier Input Pin (OSC1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.2
Crystal Amplifier Output Pin (OSC2/PTA6/RCCLK). . . . . . 104
8.5.3
Oscillator Enable Signal (SIMOSCEN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.4
X-tal Oscillator Clock (XTALCLK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.5
RC Oscillator Clock (RCCLK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5.6
Oscillator Out 2 (2OSCOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5.7
Oscillator Out (OSCOUT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.6
Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
8.6.1
Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.6.2
Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.7
Oscillator During Break Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Section 9. Monitor ROM (MON)
9.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.4
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.4.1
Entering Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.4.2
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9.4.3
Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
9.4.4
Echoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
9.4.5
Break Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Technical Data
10
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Table of Contents
MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
9.4.6
9.5
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Section 10. Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.4
Pin Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.5 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10.5.1 TIM Counter Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.5.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.5.3 Output Compare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.5.3.1
Unbuffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10.5.3.2
Buffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.5.4 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.5.4.1
Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10.5.4.2
Buffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.5.4.3
PWM Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.6
Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.7 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
10.7.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.7.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.8
TIM During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.9
I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.10 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.10.1 TIM Status and Control Register (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
10.10.2 TIM Counter Registers (TCNTH:TCNTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.10.3 TIM Counter Modulo Registers (TMODH:TMODL) . . . . . . 137
10.10.4 TIM Channel Status and Control Registers (TSC0:TSC1) .138
10.10.5 TIM Channel Registers (TCH0H/L:TCH1H/L) . . . . . . . . . . 142
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Table of Contents
11
Table of Contents
Section 11. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
11.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.4.1 ADC Port I/O Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11.4.2 Voltage Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.4.3 Conversion Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.4.4 Continuous Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.4.5 Accuracy and Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.5
Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
11.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.7.1 ADC Voltage In (ADCVIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.8.1 ADC Status and Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.8.2 ADC Data Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11.8.3 ADC Input Clock Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Section 12. Input/Output (I/O) Ports
12.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12.3 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.3.1 Port A Data Register (PTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.3.2 Data Direction Register A (DDRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.3.3 Port A Input Pull-up Enable Register (PTAPUE) . . . . . . . . 158
12.4 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12.4.1 Port B Data Register (PTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12.4.2 Data Direction Register B (DDRB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Technical Data
12
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Table of Contents
MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
12.5 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12.5.1 Port D Data Register (PTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.5.2 Data Direction Register D (DDRD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12.5.3 Port D Control Register (PDCR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Section 13. External Interrupt (IRQ)
13.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
13.4.1 IRQ1 Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.5
IRQ Module During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
13.6
IRQ Status and Control Register (INTSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Section 14. Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
14.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
14.4.1 Keyboard Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
14.4.2 Keyboard Status and Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
14.4.3 Keyboard Interrupt Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
14.5 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
14.5.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14.5.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14.6
Keyboard Module During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Section 15. Computer Operating Properly (COP)
15.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
15.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
15.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Table of Contents
13
Table of Contents
15.4 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.1 2OSCOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.2 COPCTL Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.3 Power-On Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.4 Internal Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.5 Reset Vector Fetch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
15.4.6 COPD (COP Disable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
15.4.7 COPRS (COP Rate Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
15.5
COP Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.6
Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.7
Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.8 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
15.8.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.8.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
15.9
COP Module During Break Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Section 16. Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
16.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.4
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16.5
LVI Control Register (CONFIG2/CONFIG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
16.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Section 17. Break Module (BREAK)
17.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
17.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
17.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Technical Data
14
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Table of Contents
MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
17.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
17.4.1 Flag Protection During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
17.4.2 CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
17.4.3 TIM During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
17.4.4 COP During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
17.5 Break Module Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
17.5.1 Break Status and Control Register (BRKSCR) . . . . . . . . . 193
17.5.2 Break Address Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
17.5.3 Break Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
17.5.4 Break Flag Control Register (BFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
17.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
17.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
17.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Section 18. Electrical Specifications
18.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
18.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
18.3
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
18.4
Functional Operating Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
18.5
Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
18.6
5V DC Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
18.7
5V Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
18.8
5V Oscillator Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
18.9
3V DC Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
18.10 3V Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
18.11 3V Oscillator Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
18.12 Typical Supply Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
18.13 ADC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
18.14 Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Table of Contents
15
Table of Contents
Section 19. Mechanical Specifications
19.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
19.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
19.3
20-Pin PDIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
19.4
20-Pin SOIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
19.5
28-Pin PDIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
19.6
28-Pin SOIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
19.7
48-Pin LQFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Section 20. Ordering Information
20.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
20.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
20.3
MC Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Appendix A. MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
A.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
A.3
FLASH Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.4
Low-Voltage Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.5
Oscillator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.6
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.6.1
Functional Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.6.2
DC Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
A.6.3
Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
A.6.4
Oscillator Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
A.6.5
ADC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
A.6.6
Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
A.7
MC Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Technical Data
16
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Table of Contents
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
List of Figures
Figure
Title
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
MCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
28-Pin PDIP/SOIC Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
20-Pin PDIP/SOIC Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
48-Pin LQFP Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2-1
2-2
Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Control, Status, and Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
FLASH I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
FLASH Control Register (FLCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
FLASH Programming Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
FLASH Block Protect Register (FLBPR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5-1
5-2
6-1
Configuration Register 2 (CONFIG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Configuration Register 1 (CONFIG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
Accumulator (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Index Register (H:X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Stack Pointer (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Program Counter (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Condition Code Register (CCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
SIM Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
SIM I/O Register Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
SIM Clock Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
External Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Internal Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sources of Internal Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
POR Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Page
Technical Data
List of Figures
17
List of Figures
Figure
Title
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
Interrupt Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Interrupt Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Interrupt Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Interrupt Recognition Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Interrupt Status Register 1 (INT1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Interrupt Status Register 2 (INT2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Interrupt Status Register 3 (INT3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Wait Mode Entry Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Wait Recovery from Interrupt or Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Wait Recovery from Internal Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Stop Mode Entry Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Stop Mode Recovery from Interrupt or Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Break Status Register (BSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Reset Status Register (RSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Break Flag Control Register (BFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
8-1
8-2
X-tal Oscillator External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
RC Oscillator External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
Monitor Mode Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Low-Voltage Monitor Mode Entry Flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Monitor Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Sample Monitor Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Read Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Break Transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Monitor Mode Entry Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
TIM Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
TIM I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
PWM Period and Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
TIM Status and Control Register (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
TIM Counter Registers (TCNTH:TCNTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
TIM Counter Modulo Registers (TMODH:TMODL). . . . . . . . . 137
TIM Channel Status and Control Registers (TSC0:TSC1) . . . 138
CHxMAX Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
TIM Channel Registers (TCH0H/L:TCH1H/L). . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Technical Data
18
Page
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
List of Figures
MOTOROLA
List of Figures
Figure
Title
Page
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
ADC I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
ADC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ADC Status and Control Register (ADSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ADC Data Register (ADR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ADC Input Clock Register (ADICLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
12-10
12-11
12-12
I/O Port Register Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Port A Data Register (PTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Data Direction Register A (DDRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Port A I/O Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Port A Input Pull-up Enable Register (PTAPUE) . . . . . . . . . . 158
Port B Data Register (PTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Data Direction Register B (DDRB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Port B I/O Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Port D Data Register (PTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Data Direction Register D (DDRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Port D I/O Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Port D Control Register (PDCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
IRQ Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
IRQ I/O Register Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
IRQ Status and Control Register (INTSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Configuration Register 2 (CONFIG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
KBI I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Keyboard Interrupt Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Keyboard Status and Control Register (KBSCR) . . . . . . . . . . 175
Keyboard Interrupt Enable Register (KBIER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
15-1 COP Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
15-2 Configuration Register 1 (CONFIG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
15-3 COP Control Register (COPCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
16-1 LVI Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16-2 Configuration Register 2 (CONFIG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
16-3 Configuration Register 1 (CONFIG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
List of Figures
19
List of Figures
Figure
Title
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-7
Break Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Break I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Break Status and Control Register (BRKSCR). . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Break Address Register High (BRKH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Break Address Register Low (BRKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Break Status Register (BSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Break Flag Control Register (BFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
18-1
18-2
18-3
RC vs. Frequency (5V @25°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
RC vs. Frequency (3V @25°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Typical Operating IDD (MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned On (25 °C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Typical Operating IDD (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned On (25 °C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Typical Wait Mode IDD (MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned Off (25 °C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Typical Wait Mode IDD (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned Off (25 °C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
18-4
18-5
18-6
19-1
19-2
19-3
19-4
19-5
20-Pin PDIP (Case #738) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
20-Pin SOIC (Case #751D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
28-Pin PDIP (Case #710) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
28-Pin SOIC (Case #751F). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
48-Pin LQFP (Case #932) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Technical Data
20
Page
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
List of Figures
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
List of Tables
Table
Title
Page
1-1
1-2
Summary of Device Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2-1
Vector Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6-1
6-2
Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opcode Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Signal Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
PIN Bit Set Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Interrupt Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
SIM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
Monitor Mode Entry Requirements and Options. . . . . . . . . . . 110
Monitor Mode Vector Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Monitor Baud Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
READ (Read Memory) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
WRITE (Write Memory) Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
IREAD (Indexed Read) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
IWRITE (Indexed Write) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
READSP (Read Stack Pointer) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
RUN (Run User Program) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10-1 Pin Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10-2 Prescaler Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10-3 Mode, Edge, and Level Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
11-1 MUX Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
11-2 ADC Clock Divide Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
List of Tables
21
List of Tables
Table
Title
Page
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
Port Control Register Bits Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Port A Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Port B Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Port D Pin Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-4
18-5
18-6
18-7
18-8
18-9
18-10
18-11
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
DC Electrical Characteristics (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Control Timing (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Oscillator Component Specifications (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
DC Electrical Characteristics (3V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Control Timing (3V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Oscillator Component Specifications (3V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
ADC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
20-1 MC Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
DC Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Oscillator Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
ADC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . 223
Technical Data
22
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
List of Tables
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 1. General Description
1.1 Contents
1.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4
MCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.5
Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.6
Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.2 Introduction
The MC68H(R)C908JL3E is a member of the low-cost, highperformance M68HC08 Family of 8-bit microcontroller units (MCUs).
The M68HC08 Family is based on the customer-specified integrated
circuit (CSIC) design strategy. All MCUs in the family use the enhanced
M68HC08 central processor unit (CPU08) and are available with a
variety of modules, memory sizes and types, and package types.
Table 1-1. Summary of Device Variations
Device
Oscillator Option
MC68HC908JL3E
X-TAL
MC68HRC908JL3E
RC
MC68HC908JK3E
X-TAL
MC68HRC908JK3E
RC
MC68HC908JK1E
X-TAL
MC68HRC908JK1E
RC
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory Size
Pin Count
4096 bytes
28
4096 bytes
20
1536 bytes
20
Technical Data
General Description
23
General Description
All references to the MC68H(R)C908JL3E in this data book apply
equally to the MC68H(R)C908JK3E and MC68H(R)C908JK1E, unless
otherwise stated.
1.3 Features
Features of the MC68H(R)C908JL3E include the following:
•
EMC enhanced version of MC68H(R)C908JL3/JK3/JK1
•
High-performance M68HC08 architecture
•
Fully upward-compatible object code with M6805, M146805, and
M68HC05 Families
•
Low-power design; fully static with stop and wait modes
•
Maximum internal bus frequency:
– 8-MHz at 5V operating voltage
– 4-MHz at 3V operating voltage
•
Oscillator options:
– Crystal oscillator for MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
– RC oscillator for MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
•
User program FLASH memory with security1 feature
– 4,096 bytes for MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E
– 1,536 bytes for MC68H(R)C908JK1E
•
128 bytes of on-chip RAM
•
2-channel, 16-bit timer interface module (TIM)
•
12-channel, 8-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
•
23 general purpose I/O ports for MC68H(R)C908JL3E:
– 7 keyboard interrupt with internal pull-up
(6 keyboard interrupt for MC68HC908JL3E)
– 10 LED drivers (sink)
– 2 × 25mA open-drain I/O with pull-up
1. No security feature is absolutely secure. However, Motorola’s strategy is to make reading or
copying the FLASH difficult for unauthorized users.
Technical Data
24
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
General Description
MOTOROLA
General Description
Features
•
15 general purpose I/O ports for MC68H(R)C908JK3E/JK1E:
– 1 keyboard interrupt with internal pull-up
(MC68HRC908JK3E/JK1E only)
– 4 LED drivers (sink)
– 2 × 25mA open-drain I/O with pull-up
– 10-channel ADC
•
System protection features:
– Optional computer operating properly (COP) reset
– Optional low-voltage detection with reset and selectable trip
points for 3V and 5V operation
– Illegal opcode detection with reset
– Illegal address detection with reset
•
Master reset pin with internal pull-up and power-on reset
•
IRQ1 with schmitt-trigger input and programmable pull-up
•
28-pin PDIP, 28-pin SOIC, and 48-pin LQFP packages for
MC68H(R)C908JL3E
•
20-pin PDIP and 20-pin SOIC packages for
MC68H(R)C908JK3E/JK1E
Features of the CPU08 include the following:
•
Enhanced HC05 programming model
•
Extensive loop control functions
•
16 addressing modes (eight more than the HC05)
•
16-bit index register and stack pointer
•
Memory-to-memory data transfers
•
Fast 8 × 8 multiply instruction
•
Fast 16/8 divide instruction
•
Binary-coded decimal (BCD) instructions
•
Optimization for controller applications
•
Efficient C language support
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
General Description
25
General Description
1.4 MCU Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the structure of the MC68H(R)C908JL3E.
INTERNAL BUS
M68HC08 CPU
KEYBOARD INTERRUPT
MODULE
CONTROL AND STATUS REGISTERS — 64 BYTES
8-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL
CONVERTER MODULE
USER FLASH:
MC68H(R)C908JK3E/JL3E — 4,096 BYTES
MC68H(R)C908JK1E — 1,536 BYTES
USER RAM — 128 BYTES
PORTA
ARITHMETIC/LOGIC
UNIT (ALU)
DDRA
PORTB
2-CHANNEL TIMER INTERFACE
MODULE
PTB7/ADC7
PTB6/ADC6
PTB5/ADC5
PTB4/ADC4
PTB3/ADC3
PTB2/ADC2
PTB1/ADC1
PTB0/ADC0
PTD7**†‡
PTD6**†‡
PTD5/TCH1
PTD4/TCH0
PTD3/ADC8‡
PTD2/ADC9‡
PTD1/ADC10
PTD0/ADC11
OSC1
¥
DDRB
MONITOR ROM — 960 BYTES
BREAK
MODULE
USER FLASH VECTOR SPACE — 48 BYTES
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
X-TAL OSCILLATOR
COMPUTER OPERATING
PROPERLY MODULE
OSC2
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
* RST
DDRD
RC OSCILLATOR
POWER-ON RESET
MODULE
SYSTEM INTEGRATION
MODULE
LOW-VOLTAGE INHIBIT
MODULE
* IRQ1
PTA6/KBI6**¥
PTA5/KBI5**‡
PTA4/KBI4**‡
PTA3/KBI3**‡
PTA2/KBI2**‡
PTA1/KBI1**‡
PTA0/KBI0**‡
PORTD
CPU
REGISTERS
#
#
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
MODULE
VDD
POWER
VSS
ADC REFERENCE
* Pin contains integrated pull-up device.
** Pin contains programmable pull-up device.
† 25mA open-drain if output pin.
‡ LED direct sink pin.
# Pins available on MC68H(R)C908JL3E only.
¥ Shared pin: MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — OSC2
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — RCCLK/PTA6/KBI6
Figure 1-1. MCU Block Diagram
Technical Data
26
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
General Description
MOTOROLA
General Description
Pin Assignments
1.5 Pin Assignments
IRQ1
1
28
RST
PTA0/KBI0
2
27
PTA5/KBI5
VSS
3
26
PTD4/TCH0
OSC1
4
25
PTD5/TCH1
OSC2/RCCLK/PTA6/KBI
5
24
PTD2/ADC9
PTA1/KBI1
6
23
PTA4/KBI4
VDD
7
22
PTD3/ADC8
PTA2/KBI2
8
21
PTB0/ADC0
PTA3/KBI3
9
20
PTB1/ADC1
PTB7/ADC7
10
19
PTD1/ADC10
PTB6/ADC6
11
18
PTB2/ADC2
PTB5/ADC5
12
17
PTB3/ADC3
PTD7
13
16
PTD0/ADC11
PTD6
14
15
PTB4/ADC4
MC68H(R)C908JL3E
Figure 1-2. 28-Pin PDIP/SOIC Pin Assignment
IRQ1
1
20
RST
VSS
2
19
PTD4/TCH0
OSC1
3
18
PTD5/TCH1
OSC2/RCCLK/PTA6/KBI
4
17
PTD2/ADC9
VDD
5
16
PTD3/ADC8
PTB7/ADC7
6
15
PTB0/ADC0
PTB6/ADC6
7
14
PTB1/ADC1
PTB5/ADC5
8
13
PTB2/ADC2
PTD7
9
12
PTB3/ADC3
PTD6
10
11
PTB4/ADC4
Pins not available on 20-pin packages
PTA0/KBI0
PTD0/ADC11
PTA1/KBI1
PTD1/ADC10
PTA2/KBI2
PTA3/KBI3
PTA4/KBI4
PTA5/KBI5
Internal pads are unconnected.
MC68H(R)C908JK3E/JK1E
Figure 1-3. 20-Pin PDIP/SOIC Pin Assignment
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
General Description
27
NC
VSS
PTA0/KBI0
IRQ1
RST
PTA5/KBI5
PTD4/TCH0
PTD5/TCH1
NC
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37 NC
NC
47
48 NC
General Description
36 NC
NC 1
NC
2
35
NC
OSC1
3
34
NC
OSC2/RCCLK/PTA6/KBI6
4
33
PTD2/ADC9
PTA1/KBI1
5
32
PTA4/KBI4
NC
6
31
PTD3/ADC8
VDD
7
30
NC
PTA2/KBI2
8
29
PTB0/ADC0
PTA3KBI3
9
28
PTB1/ADC1
PTB7/ADC7
10
27
PTD1/ADC10
NC
11
26
NC
25 NC
NC 24
23
20
PTD0/ADC11
NC
19
PTB4/ADC4
22
18
PTD6
PTB2/ADC2
17
PTD7
21
16
PTB5/ADC5
PTB3/ADC3
15
PTB6/ADC6
NC: No connection
14
NC 13
NC 12
NC
MC68H(R)C908JL3E
Figure 1-4. 48-Pin LQFP Pin Assignment
Technical Data
28
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
General Description
MOTOROLA
General Description
Pin Functions
1.6 Pin Functions
Description of the pin functions are provided in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2. Pin Functions
PIN NAME
PIN DESCRIPTION
IN/OUT
VOLTAGE LEVEL
In
5V or 3V
Out
0V
VDD
Power supply.
VSS
Power supply ground
RST
RESET input, active low.
With Internal pull-up and schmitt trigger input.
Input
VDD
IRQ1
External IRQ pin.
With software programmable internal pull-up and
schmitt trigger input.
This pin is also used for mode entry selection.
Input
VDD to VDD+VHI
OSC1
X-tal or RC oscillator input.
In
Analog
Out
Analog
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E:
Default is RC oscillator clock output, RCCLK.
Shared with PTA6/KBI6, with programmable pull-up.
In/Out
VDD
7-bit general purpose I/O port.
In/Out
VDD
Shared with 7 keyboard interrupts KBI[0:6].
In
VDD
Each pin has programmable internal pull-up device.
In
VDD
PTA[0:5] have LED direct sink capability
In
VSS
In/Out
VDD
In
Analog
8-bit general purpose I/O port.
In/Out
VDD
PTD[3:0] shared with 4 ADC inputs, ADC[8:11].
Input
Analog
PTD[4:5] shared with TIM channels, TCH0 and TCH1.
In/Out
VDD
In
VSS
In/Out
VDD
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E:
X-tal oscillator output, this is the inverting OSC1
signal.
OSC2
PTA[0:6]
8-bit general purpose I/O port.
PTB[0:7]
Shared with 8 ADC inputs, ADC[0:7].
PTD[0:7]
PTD[2:3], PTD[6:7] have LED direct sink capability
PTD[6:7] can be configured as 25mA open-drain
output with pull-up.
NOTE:
On the MC68H(R)C908JK3E/JK1E, the following pins are not available:
PTA0, PTA1, PTA2, PTA3, PTA4, PTA5, PTD0, and PTD1.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
General Description
29
General Description
Technical Data
30
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
General Description
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 2. Memory Map
2.1 Contents
2.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3
I/O Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.4
Monitor ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.2 Introduction
The CPU08 can address 64 Kbytes of memory space. The memory
map, shown in Figure 2-1, includes:
•
4,096 bytes of user FLASH — MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E
1,536 bytes of user FLASH — MC68H(R)C908JK1E
•
128 bytes of RAM
•
48 bytes of user-defined vectors
•
960 bytes of Monitor ROM
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Memory Map
31
Memory Map
$0000
↓
$003F
I/O REGISTERS
64 BYTES
$0040
↓
$007F
RESERVED
64 BYTES
$0080
↓
$00FF
RAM
128 BYTES
$0100
↓
$EBFF
UNIMPLEMENTED
60,160 BYTES
$EC00
↓
$FBFF
FLASH MEMORY
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E
4,096 BYTES
$FC00
↓
$FDFF
MONITOR ROM
512 BYTES
$FE00
BREAK STATUS REGISTER (BSR)
$FE01
RESET STATUS REGISTER (RSR)
$FE02
RESERVED (UBAR)
$FE03
BREAK FLAG CONTROL REGISTER (BFCR)
$FE04
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER 1 (INT1)
$FE05
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER 2 (INT2)
$FE06
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER 3 (INT3)
$FE07
RESERVED
$FE08
FLASH CONTROL REGISTER (FLCR)
$FE09
FLASH BLOCK PROTECT REGISTER (FLBPR)
$FE0A
RESERVED
$FE0B
RESERVED
$FE0C
BREAK ADDRESS HIGH REGISTER (BRKH)
$FE0D
BREAK ADDRESS LOW REGISTER (BRKL)
$FE0E
BREAK STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER (BRKSCR)
$FE0F
RESERVED
$FE10
↓
$FFCF
MONITOR ROM
448 BYTES
$FFD0
↓
$FFFF
USER VECTORS
48 BYTES
UNIMPLEMENTED
62,720 BYTES
$0100
↓
$F5FF
FLASH MEMORY
MC68H(R)C908JK1E
1,536 BYTES
$F600
↓
$FBFF
Figure 2-1. Memory Map
Technical Data
32
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Memory Map
MOTOROLA
Memory Map
I/O Section
2.3 I/O Section
Addresses $0000–$003F, shown in Figure 2-2, contain most of the
control, status, and data registers. Additional I/O registers have the
following addresses:
•
$FE00; Break Status Register, BSR
•
$FE01; Reset Status Register, RSR
•
$FE02; Reserved
•
$FE03; Break Flag Control Register, BFCR
•
$FE04; Interrupt Status Register 1, INT1
•
$FE05; Interrupt Status Register 2, INT2
•
$FE06; Interrupt Status Register 3, INT3
•
$FE07; Reserved
•
$FE08; FLASH Control Register, FLCR
•
$FE09; FLASH Block Protect Register, FLBPR
•
$FE0A; Reserved
•
$FE0B; Reserved
•
$FE0C; Break Address Register High, BRKH
•
$FE0D; Break Address Register Low, BRKL
•
$FE0E; Break Status and Control Register, BRKSCR
•
$FE0F; Reserved
•
$FFFF; COP Control Register, COPCTL
2.4 Monitor ROM
The 960 bytes at addresses $FC00–$FDFF and $FE10–$FFCF are
reserved ROM addresses that contain the instructions for the monitor
functions. (See Section 9. Monitor ROM (MON).)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Memory Map
33
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name
$0000
Read:
Port A Data Register
Write:
(PTA)
Reset:
$0001
Bit 7
Read:
Port B Data Register
Write:
(PTB)
Reset:
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PTA6
PTA5
PTA4
PTA3
PTA2
PTA1
PTA0
PTB2
PTB1
PTB0
PTD2
PTD1
PTD0
Unaffected by reset
PTB7
PTB6
PTB5
PTB4
PTB3
Unaffected by reset
Read:
$0002
Unimplemented Write:
$0003
Read:
Port D Data Register
Write:
(PTD)
Reset:
Read:
Data Direction Register A
$0004
Write:
(DDRA)
Reset:
PTD7
PTD6
PTD5
PTD4
PTD3
Unaffected by reset
0
DDRA6
DDRA5
DDRA4
DDRA3
DDRA2
DDRA1
DDRA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDRB6
DDRB5
DDRB4
DDRB3
DDRB2
DDRB1
DDRB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDRD6
DDRD5
DDRD4
DDRD3
DDRD2
DDRD1
DDRD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
DDRB7
Data Direction Register B
$0005
Write:
(DDRB)
Reset:
0
Read:
Unimplemented Write:
$0006
Read:
DDRD7
Data Direction Register D
$0007
Write:
(DDRD)
Reset:
0
Read:
$0008
↓
$0009
Unimplemented Write:
$000A
Read:
Port D Control Register
Write:
(PDCR)
Reset:
= Unimplemented
SLOWD7 SLOWD6 PTDPU7
0
R
0
0
PTDPU6
0
= Reserved
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers (Sheet 1 of 5)
Technical Data
34
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Memory Map
MOTOROLA
Memory Map
Monitor ROM
Addr.
Register Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Read:
$000B
↓
$000C
Unimplemented Write:
Read:
Port A Input Pull-up
PTA6EN PTAPUE6 PTAPUE5 PTAPUE4 PTAPUE3 PTAPUE2 PTAPUE1 PTAPUE0
Enable Register Write:
(PTAPUE)
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
$000D
$000E
↓
$0019
$001A
Bit 7
Read:
Unimplemented Write:
Read:
Keyboard Status and
Control Register Write:
(KBSCR)
Reset:
0
Read:
Keyboard Interrupt
Enable Register Write:
(KBIER)
Reset:
0
$001B
0
0
0
KEYF
0
ACKK
0
IMASKK
MODEK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
KBIE6
KBIE5
KBIE4
KBIE3
KBIE2
KBIE1
KBIE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IRQF1
0
IMASK1
MODE1
Read:
$001C
$001D
$001E
$001F
Unimplemented Write:
Read:
IRQ Status and Control
Register Write:
(INTSCR)
Reset:
ACK1
0
Read:
IRQPUD
Configuration Register 2
† Write:
(CONFIG2)
Reset:
0
Read:
COPRS
Configuration Register 1
Write:
(CONFIG1)†
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
LVIT1
LVIT0
R
R
R
0
0
0*
0*
0
0
0
R
R
LVID
R
SSREC
STOP
COPD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PS2
PS1
PS0
0
0
0
† One-time writable register after each reset. * LVIT1 and LVIT0 reset to logic 0 by a power-on reset (POR) only.
$0020
Read:
TIM Status and Control
Register Write:
(TSC)
Reset:
TOF
0
0
TOIE
TSTOP
0
1
= Unimplemented
0
0
TRST
0
0
R
= Reserved
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers (Sheet 2 of 5)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Memory Map
35
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
$0021
Read:
TIM Counter Register
High Write:
(TCNTH)
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
TIM Counter Register
Low Write:
(TCNTL)
Reset:
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CH0IE
MS0B
MS0A
ELS0B
ELS0A
TOV0
CH0MAX
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
$0022
$0023
$0024
Read:
TIM Counter Modulo
Register High Write:
(TMODH)
Reset:
Read:
TIM Counter Modulo
Register Low Write:
(TMODL)
Reset:
Read:
TIM Channel 0 Status and
$0025
Control Register Write:
(TSC0)
Reset:
$0026
$0027
Read:
TIM Channel 0
Register High Write:
(TCH0H)
Reset:
Read:
TIM Channel 0
Register Low Write:
(TCH0L)
Reset:
Read:
TIM Channel 1 Status and
$0028
Control Register Write:
(TSC1)
Reset:
$0029
$002A
Read:
TIM Channel 1
Register High Write:
(TCH1H)
Reset:
Read:
TIM Channel 1
Register Low Write:
(TCH1L)
Reset:
CH0F
0
Indeterminate after reset
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Indeterminate after reset
CH1F
0
CH1IE
0
MS1A
ELS1B
ELS1A
TOV1
CH1MAX
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Indeterminate after reset
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Indeterminate after reset
= Unimplemented
R
= Reserved
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers (Sheet 3 of 5)
Technical Data
36
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Memory Map
MOTOROLA
Memory Map
Monitor ROM
Addr.
Register Name
$002B
↓
$003B
$003C
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
AIEN
ADCO
ADCH4
ADCH3
ADCH2
ADCH1
ADCH0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
Read:
Unimplemented Write:
Read:
ADC Status and Control
Register Write:
(ADSCR)
Reset:
Read:
ADC Data Register
Write:
(ADR)
Reset:
$003D
Read:
ADC Input Clock Register
$003E
Write:
(ADICLK)
Reset:
COCO
Indeterminate after reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
ADIV2
ADIV1
ADIV0
0
0
R
R
Read:
$003F
$FE00
Unimplemented Write:
Read:
Break Status Register
Write:
(BSR)
Reset:
SBSW
See note
R
0
Note: Writing a logic 0 clears SBSW.
$FE01
Read:
Reset Status Register
Write:
(RSR)
POR:
Read:
$FE02
Reserved Write:
$FE03
Read:
Break Flag Control
Register Write:
(BFCR)
Reset:
Read:
Interrupt Status Register 1
$FE04
Write:
(INT1)
Reset:
POR
PIN
COP
ILOP
ILAD
MODRST
LVI
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
BCFE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
IF5
IF4
IF3
0
IF1
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
R
= Reserved
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers (Sheet 4 of 5)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Memory Map
37
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Read:
Interrupt Status Register 2
$FE05
Write:
(INT2)
Reset:
IF14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Interrupt Status Register 3
Write:
$FE06
(INT3)
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IF15
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
0
0
0
HVEN
MASS
ERASE
PGM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BPR7
BPR6
BPR5
BPR4
BPR3
BPR2
BPR1
BPR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BRKE
BRKA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
$FE07
Reserved Write:
$FE08
Read:
FLASH Control Register
Write:
(FLCR)
Reset:
$FE09
Read:
FLASH Block Protect
Write:
Register (FLBPR)
Reset:
Read:
$FE0A
↓
$FE0B
Reserved Write:
$FE0C
Read:
Break Address High
Register Write:
(BRKH)
Reset:
$FE0D
Read:
Break Address low
Register Write:
(BRKL)
Reset:
Read:
Break Status and Control
$FE0E
Register Write:
(BRKSCR)
Reset:
$FFFF
Read:
COP Control Register
Write:
(COPCTL)
Reset:
Low byte of reset vector
Writing clears COP counter (any value)
Unaffected by reset
= Unimplemented
R
= Reserved
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers (Sheet 5 of 5)
Technical Data
38
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Memory Map
MOTOROLA
Memory Map
Monitor ROM
.
Table 2-1. Vector Addresses
Vector Priority
INT Flag
Address
Lowest
—
$FFD0
↓
$FFDD
Not Used
$FFDE
ADC Conversion Complete Vector (High)
$FFDF
ADC Conversion Complete Vector (Low)
$FFE0
Keyboard Vector (High)
$FFE1
Keyboard Vector (Low)
IF15
IF14
IF13
↓
IF6
IF5
IF4
IF3
IF2
IF1
—
Highest
—
—
Not Used
$FFF2
TIM Overflow Vector (High)
$FFF3
TIM Overflow Vector (Low)
$FFF4
TIM Channel 1 Vector (High)
$FFF5
TIM Channel 1 Vector (Low)
$FFF6
TIM Channel 0 Vector (High)
$FFF7
TIM Channel 0 Vector (Low)
—
Not Used
$FFFA
IRQ1 Vector (High)
$FFFB
IRQ1 Vector (Low)
$FFFC
SWI Vector (High)
$FFFD
SWI Vector (Low)
$FFFE
Reset Vector (High)
$FFFF
Reset Vector (Low)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Vector
Technical Data
Memory Map
39
Memory Map
Technical Data
40
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Memory Map
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 3. Random-Access Memory (RAM)
3.1 Contents
3.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2 Introduction
This section describes the 128 bytes of RAM.
3.3 Functional Description
Addresses $0080 through $00FF are RAM locations. The location of the
stack RAM is programmable. The 16-bit stack pointer allows the stack to
be anywhere in the 64-Kbyte memory space.
NOTE:
For correct operation, the stack pointer must point only to RAM
locations.
Within page zero are 128 bytes of RAM. Because the location of the
stack RAM is programmable, all page zero RAM locations can be used
for I/O control and user data or code. When the stack pointer is moved
from its reset location at $00FF, direct addressing mode instructions can
access efficiently all page zero RAM locations. Page zero RAM,
therefore, provides ideal locations for frequently accessed global
variables.
Before processing an interrupt, the CPU uses five bytes of the stack to
save the contents of the CPU registers.
NOTE:
For M6805 compatibility, the H register is not stacked.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Random-Access Memory (RAM)
Technical Data
41
Random-Access Memory (RAM)
During a subroutine call, the CPU uses two bytes of the stack to store
the return address. The stack pointer decrements during pushes and
increments during pulls.
NOTE:
Technical Data
42
Be careful when using nested subroutines. The CPU may overwrite data
in the RAM during a subroutine or during the interrupt stacking
operation.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Random-Access Memory (RAM)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 4. FLASH Memory (FLASH)
4.1 Contents
4.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.4
FLASH Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
4.5
FLASH Page Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.6
FLASH Mass Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.7
FLASH Program Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.8
FLASH Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.9
FLASH Block Protect Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.2 Introduction
This section describes the operation of the embedded FLASH memory.
The FLASH memory can be read, programmed, and erased from a
single external supply. The program and erase operations are enabled
through the use of an internal charge pump.
Device
FLASH Memory Size
(Bytes)
Memory Address Range
MC68H(R)C908JL3E
4,096
$EC00—$FBFF
MC68H(R)C908JK3E
4,096
$EC00—$FBFF
MC68H(R)C908JK1E
1,536
$F600—$FBFF
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Technical Data
43
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Addr.
$FE08
$FE09
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BPR7
BPR6
0
0
Read:
FLASH Control Register
Write:
(FLCR)
Reset:
Read:
FLASH Block Protect
Register Write:
(FLBPR)
Reset:
3
2
1
Bit 0
HVEN
MASS
ERASE
PGM
0
0
0
0
0
BPR5
BPR4
BPR3
BPR2
BPR1
BPR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 4-1. FLASH I/O Register Summary
4.3 Functional Description
The FLASH memory consists of an array of 4,096 or 1,536 bytes with an
additional 48 bytes for user vectors. The minimum size of FLASH
memory that can be erased is 64 bytes (a page); and the maximum size
of FLASH memory that can be programmed in a program cycle is 32
bytes (a row). Program and erase operations are facilitated through
control bits in the Flash Control Register (FLCR). Details for these
operations appear later in this section. The address ranges for the user
memory and vectors are:
NOTE:
•
$EC00–$FBFF; user memory; 4,096 bytes;
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E
$F600–$FBFF; user memory; 1,536 bytes;
MC68H(R)C908JK1E
•
$FFD0–$FFFF; user interrupt vectors; 48 bytes
An erased bit reads as logic 1 and a programmed bit reads as logic 0.
A security feature prevents viewing of the FLASH contents.1
1. No security feature is absolutely secure. However, Motorola’s strategy is to make reading or
copying the FLASH difficult for unauthorized users.
Technical Data
44
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
FLASH Control Register
4.4 FLASH Control Register
The FLASH Control Register controls FLASH program and erase
operations.
Address:
Read:
$FE08
Bit 7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
Bit 0
HVEN
MASS
ERASE
PGM
0
0
0
0
Write:
Reset:
0
0
0
0
Figure 4-2. FLASH Control Register (FLCR)
HVEN — High Voltage Enable Bit
This read/write bit enables high voltage from the charge pump to the
memory for either program or erase operation. It can only be set if
either PGM=1 or ERASE=1 and the proper sequence for program or
erase is followed.
1 = High voltage enabled to array and charge pump on
0 = High voltage disabled to array and charge pump off
MASS — Mass Erase Control Bit
This read/write bit configures the memory for mass erase operation or
page erase operation when the ERASE bit is set.
1 = Mass erase operation selected
0 = Page erase operation selected
ERASE — Erase Control Bit
This read/write bit configures the memory for erase operation. This bit
and the PGM bit should not be set to 1 at the same time.
1 = Erase operation selected
0 = Erase operation not selected
PGM — Program Control Bit
This read/write bit configures the memory for program operation. This
bit and the ERASE bit should not be set to 1 at the same time.
1 = Program operation selected
0 = Program operation not selected
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Technical Data
45
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
4.5 FLASH Page Erase Operation
Use the following procedure to erase a page of FLASH memory. A page
consists of 64 consecutive bytes starting from addresses $XX00,
$XX40, $XX80 or $XXC0. The 48-byte user interrupt vectors area also
forms a page. Any page within the 4K bytes user memory area
($EC00–$FBFF) can be erased alone. The 48-byte user interrupt
vectors cannot be erased by the page erase operation because of
security reasons. Mass erase is required to erase this page.
1. Set the ERASE bit and clear the MASS bit in the FLASH Control
Register.
2. Write any data to any FLASH address within the page address
range desired.
3. Wait for a time, tnvs (10µs).
4. Set the HVEN bit.
5. Wait for a time tErase (1ms).
6. Clear the ERASE bit.
7. Wait for a time, tnvh (5µs).
8. Clear the HVEN bit.
9. After time, trcv (1µs), the memory can be accessed in read mode
again.
NOTE:
Technical Data
46
Programming and erasing of FLASH locations cannot be performed by
code being executed from the FLASH memory. While these operations
must be performed in the order as shown, but other unrelated operations
may occur between the steps.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
FLASH Mass Erase Operation
4.6 FLASH Mass Erase Operation
Use the following procedure to erase the entire FLASH memory:
1. Set both the ERASE bit and the MASS bit in the FLASH Control
Register.
2. Write any data to any FLASH location within the FLASH memory
address range.
3. Wait for a time, tnvs (10µs).
4. Set the HVEN bit.
5. Wait for a time tMErase (4ms).
6. Clear the ERASE bit.
7. Wait for a time, tnvh1 (100µs).
8. Clear the HVEN bit.
9. After time, trcv (1µs), the memory can be accessed in read mode
again.
NOTE:
Programming and erasing of FLASH locations cannot be performed by
code being executed from the FLASH memory. While these operations
must be performed in the order as shown, but other unrelated operations
may occur between the steps.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Technical Data
47
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
4.7 FLASH Program Operation
Programming of the FLASH memory is done on a row basis. A row
consists of 32 consecutive bytes starting from addresses $XX00,
$XX20, $XX40, $XX60, $XX80, $XXA0, $XXC0 or $XXE0. Use this
step-by-step procedure to program a row of FLASH memory:
(Figure 4-3 shows a flowchart of the programming algorithm.)
1. Set the PGM bit. This configures the memory for program
operation and enables the latching of address and data for
programming.
2. Write any data to any FLASH location within the address range of
the row to be programmed.
3. Wait for a time, tnvs (10µs).
4. Set the HVEN bit.
5. Wait for a time, tpgs (5µs).
6. Write data to the byte being programmed.
7. Wait for time, tPROG (30µs).
8. Repeat step 6 and 7 until all the bytes within the row are
programmed.
9. Clear the PGM bit.
10. Wait for time, tnvh (5µs).
11. Clear the HVEN bit.
12. After time, trcv (1µs), the memory can be accessed in read mode
again.
This program sequence is repeated throughout the memory until all data
is programmed.
Technical Data
48
NOTE:
The time between each FLASH address change (step 6 to step 6), or the
time between the last FLASH addressed programmed to clearing the
PGM bit (step 6 to step 10), must not exceed the maximum programming
time, tPROG max.
NOTE:
Programming and erasing of FLASH locations cannot be performed by
code being executed from the FLASH memory. While these operations
must be performed in the order shown, other unrelated operations may
occur between the steps.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
FLASH Program Operation
1
Set PGM bit
Algorithm for programming
a row (32 bytes) of FLASH memory
2
Write any data to any FLASH address
within the row address range desired
3
Wait for a time, tnvs
4
Set HVEN bit
5
Wait for a time, tpgs
6
7
Write data to the FLASH address
to be programmed
Wait for a time, tPROG
Completed
programming
this row?
Y
N
NOTE:
The time between each FLASH address change (step 6 to step 6), or
the time between the last FLASH address programmed
to clearing PGM bit (step 6 to step 9)
must not exceed the maximum programming
time, tPROG max.
9
Clear PGM bit
10
Wait for a time, tnvh
11
Clear HVEN bit
12
Wait for a time, trcv
This row program algorithm assumes the row/s
to be programmed are initially erased.
End of Programming
Figure 4-3. FLASH Programming Flowchart
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Technical Data
49
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
4.8 FLASH Protection
Due to the ability of the on-board charge pump to erase and program the
FLASH memory in the target application, provision is made to protect
blocks of memory from unintentional erase or program operations due to
system malfunction. This protection is done by use of a FLASH Block
Protect Register (FLBPR). The FLBPR determines the range of the
FLASH memory which is to be protected. The range of the protected
area starts from a location defined by FLBPR and ends to the bottom of
the FLASH memory ($FFFF). When the memory is protected, the HVEN
bit cannot be set in either ERASE or PROGRAM operations.
4.9 FLASH Block Protect Register
The FLASH Block Protect Register is implemented as an 8-bit I/O
register. The value in this register determines the starting address of the
protected range within the FLASH memory.
Address:
$FE09
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
BPR7
BPR6
BPR5
BPR4
BPR3
BPR2
BPR1
BPR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Figure 4-4. FLASH Block Protect Register (FLBPR)
BPR[7:0] — FLASH Block Protect Register Bit 7 to Bit 0
BPR[7:1] represent bits [12:6] of a 16-bit memory address. Bits
[15:13] are logic 1’s and bits [5:0] are logic 0’s.
16-bit memory address
Start address of FLASH block protect
1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
BPR[7:1]
BPR0 is used only for BPR[7:0] = $FF, for no block protection.
Technical Data
50
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
FLASH Block Protect Register
The resultant 16-bit address is used for specifying the start address
of the FLASH memory for block protection. The FLASH is protected
from this start address to the end of FLASH memory, at $FFFF. With
this mechanism, the protect start address can be XX00, XX40, XX80,
or XXC0 (at page boundaries — 64 bytes) within the FLASH memory.
Examples of protect start address:
BPR[7:0]
Start of Address of Protect Range
$00–$60
The entire FLASH memory is protected.
$62 or $63
(0110 001x)
$EC40 (1110 1100 0100 0000)
$64 or $65
(0110 010x)
$EC80 (1110 1100 1000 0000)
$68 or $69
(0110 100x)
$ED00 (1110 1101 0000 0000)
and so on...
$DE or $DF
(1101 111x)
$FBC0 (1111 1011 1100 0000)
$FE
(1111 1110)
$FFC0 (1111 1111 1100 0000)
$FF
The entire FLASH memory is not protected.
Note:
The end address of the protected range is always $FFFF.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Technical Data
51
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Technical Data
52
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG)
5.1 Contents
5.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.2 Introduction
This section describes the configuration registers (CONFIG1 and
CONFIG2). The configuration registers enables or disables the following
options:
•
Stop mode recovery time (32 × 2OSCOUT cycles or
4096 × 2OSCOUT cycles)
•
STOP instruction
•
Computer operating properly module (COP)
•
COP reset period (COPRS), (213 –24) × 2OSCOUT or
(218 –24) × 2OSCOUT
•
Enable LVI circuit
•
Select LVI trip voltage
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Technical Data
53
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
5.3 Functional Description
The configuration register is used in the initialization of various options.
The configuration register can be written once after each reset. All of the
configuration register bits are cleared during reset. Since the various
options affect the operation of the MCU it is recommended that this
register be written immediately after reset. The configuration register is
located at $001E and $001F, and may be read at anytime.
NOTE:
The CONFIG registers are one-time writable by the user after each
reset. Upon a reset, the CONFIG registers default to predetermined
settings as shown in Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2.
Address:
$001E
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
IRQPUD
R
R
LVIT1
LVIT0
R
R
R
Reset:
0
0
0
Not affected
Not affected
0
0
0
POR:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
R
= Reserved
Figure 5-1. Configuration Register 2 (CONFIG2)
IRQPUD — IRQ1 Pin Pull-up control bit
1 = Internal pull-up is disconnected
0 = Internal pull-up is connected between IRQ1 pin and VDD
LVIT1, LVIT0 — Low Voltage Inhibit trip voltage selection bits
Detail description of the LVI control signals is given in Section 16.
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
Technical Data
54
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
MOTOROLA
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Functional Description
Address:
$001F
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
COPRS
R
R
LVID
R
SSREC
STOP
COPD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
R
= Reserved
Figure 5-2. Configuration Register 1 (CONFIG1)
COPRS — COP reset period selection bit
1 = COP reset cycle is (213 – 24) × 2OSCOUT
0 = COP reset cycle is (218 – 24) × 2OSCOUT
LVID — Low Voltage Inhibit Disable Bit
1 = Low Voltage Inhibit disabled
0 = Low Voltage Inhibit enabled
SSREC — Short Stop Recovery Bit
SSREC enables the CPU to exit stop mode with a delay of
32 × 2OSCOUT cycles instead of a 4096 × 2OSCOUT cycle delay.
1 = Stop mode recovery after 32 × 2OSCOUT cycles
0 = Stop mode recovery after 4096 × 2OSCOUT cycles
NOTE:
Exiting stop mode by pulling reset will result in the long stop recovery.
If using an external crystal, do not set the SSREC bit.
STOP — STOP Instruction Enable
STOP enables the STOP instruction.
1 = STOP instruction enabled
0 = STOP instruction treated as illegal opcode
COPD — COP Disable Bit
COPD disables the COP module. (See Section 15. Computer
Operating Properly (COP).)
1 = COP module disabled
0 = COP module enabled
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Technical Data
55
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Technical Data
56
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 6. Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.1 Contents
6.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.4
CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.4.1
Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
6.4.2
Index Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.4.3
Stack Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.4.4
Program Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.4.5
Condition Code Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
6.5
Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
6.6
Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
6.6.1
Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.6.2
Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.7
CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.8
Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.9
Opcode Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.2 Introduction
The M68HC08 CPU (central processor unit) is an enhanced and fully
object-code-compatible version of the M68HC05 CPU. The CPU08
Reference Manual (Motorola document order number CPU08RM/AD)
contains a description of the CPU instruction set, addressing modes,
and architecture.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
57
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.3 Features
•
Object code fully upward-compatible with M68HC05 Family
•
16-bit stack pointer with stack manipulation instructions
•
16-bit index register with x-register manipulation instructions
•
8-MHz CPU internal bus frequency
•
64-Kbyte program/data memory space
•
16 addressing modes
•
Memory-to-memory data moves without using accumulator
•
Fast 8-bit by 8-bit multiply and 16-bit by 8-bit divide instructions
•
Enhanced binary-coded decimal (BCD) data handling
•
Modular architecture with expandable internal bus definition for
extension of addressing range beyond 64 Kbytes
•
Low-power stop and wait modes
6.4 CPU Registers
Figure 6-1 shows the five CPU registers. CPU registers are not part of
the memory map.
Technical Data
58
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
CPU Registers
7
0
ACCUMULATOR (A)
15
0
H
X
INDEX REGISTER (H:X)
0
15
STACK POINTER (SP)
0
15
PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
7
0
V 1 1 H I N Z C
CONDITION CODE REGISTER (CCR)
CARRY/BORROW FLAG
ZERO FLAG
NEGATIVE FLAG
INTERRUPT MASK
HALF-CARRY FLAG
TWO’S COMPLEMENT OVERFLOW FLAG
Figure 6-1. CPU Registers
6.4.1 Accumulator
The accumulator is a general-purpose 8-bit register. The CPU uses the
accumulator to hold operands and the results of arithmetic/logic
operations.
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Unaffected by reset
Figure 6-2. Accumulator (A)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
59
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.4.2 Index Register
The 16-bit index register allows indexed addressing of a 64-Kbyte
memory space. H is the upper byte of the index register, and X is the
lower byte. H:X is the concatenated 16-bit index register.
In the indexed addressing modes, the CPU uses the contents of the
index register to determine the conditional address of the operand.
The index register can serve also as a temporary data storage location.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Read:
Write:
Reset:
X = Indeterminate
Figure 6-3. Index Register (H:X)
6.4.3 Stack Pointer
The stack pointer is a 16-bit register that contains the address of the next
location on the stack. During a reset, the stack pointer is preset to
$00FF. The reset stack pointer (RSP) instruction sets the least
significant byte to $FF and does not affect the most significant byte. The
stack pointer decrements as data is pushed onto the stack and
increments as data is pulled from the stack.
In the stack pointer 8-bit offset and 16-bit offset addressing modes, the
stack pointer can function as an index register to access data on the
stack. The CPU uses the contents of the stack pointer to determine the
conditional address of the operand.
Technical Data
60
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
CPU Registers
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Figure 6-4. Stack Pointer (SP)
NOTE:
The location of the stack is arbitrary and may be relocated anywhere in
RAM. Moving the SP out of page 0 ($0000 to $00FF) frees direct
address (page 0) space. For correct operation, the stack pointer must
point only to RAM locations.
6.4.4 Program Counter
The program counter is a 16-bit register that contains the address of the
next instruction or operand to be fetched.
Normally, the program counter automatically increments to the next
sequential memory location every time an instruction or operand is
fetched. Jump, branch, and interrupt operations load the program
counter with an address other than that of the next sequential location.
During reset, the program counter is loaded with the reset vector
address located at $FFFE and $FFFF. The vector address is the
address of the first instruction to be executed after exiting the reset state.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Loaded with Vector from $FFFE and $FFFF
Figure 6-5. Program Counter (PC)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
61
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.4.5 Condition Code Register
The 8-bit condition code register contains the interrupt mask and five
flags that indicate the results of the instruction just executed. Bits 6 and
5 are set permanently to logic 1. The following paragraphs describe the
functions of the condition code register.
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
V
1
1
H
I
N
Z
C
X
1
1
X
1
X
X
X
Read:
Write:
Reset:
X = Indeterminate
Figure 6-6. Condition Code Register (CCR)
V — Overflow Flag
The CPU sets the overflow flag when a two's complement overflow
occurs. The signed branch instructions BGT, BGE, BLE, and BLT use
the overflow flag.
1 = Overflow
0 = No overflow
H — Half-Carry Flag
The CPU sets the half-carry flag when a carry occurs between
accumulator bits 3 and 4 during an add-without-carry (ADD) or addwith-carry (ADC) operation. The half-carry flag is required for binarycoded decimal (BCD) arithmetic operations. The DAA instruction
uses the states of the H and C flags to determine the appropriate
correction factor.
1 = Carry between bits 3 and 4
0 = No carry between bits 3 and 4
I — Interrupt Mask
When the interrupt mask is set, all maskable CPU interrupts are
disabled. CPU interrupts are enabled when the interrupt mask is
cleared. When a CPU interrupt occurs, the interrupt mask is set
automatically after the CPU registers are saved on the stack, but
before the interrupt vector is fetched.
1 = Interrupts disabled
0 = Interrupts enabled
Technical Data
62
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
CPU Registers
NOTE:
To maintain M6805 Family compatibility, the upper byte of the index
register (H) is not stacked automatically. If the interrupt service routine
modifies H, then the user must stack and unstack H using the PSHH and
PULH instructions.
After the I bit is cleared, the highest-priority interrupt request is
serviced first.
A return-from-interrupt (RTI) instruction pulls the CPU registers from
the stack and restores the interrupt mask from the stack. After any
reset, the interrupt mask is set and can be cleared only by the clear
interrupt mask software instruction (CLI).
N — Negative flag
The CPU sets the negative flag when an arithmetic operation, logic
operation, or data manipulation produces a negative result, setting
bit 7 of the result.
1 = Negative result
0 = Non-negative result
Z — Zero flag
The CPU sets the zero flag when an arithmetic operation, logic
operation, or data manipulation produces a result of $00.
1 = Zero result
0 = Non-zero result
C — Carry/Borrow Flag
The CPU sets the carry/borrow flag when an addition operation
produces a carry out of bit 7 of the accumulator or when a subtraction
operation requires a borrow. Some instructions — such as bit test and
branch, shift, and rotate — also clear or set the carry/borrow flag.
1 = Carry out of bit 7
0 = No carry out of bit 7
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
63
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.5 Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU)
The ALU performs the arithmetic and logic operations defined by the
instruction set.
Refer to the CPU08 Reference Manual (Motorola document order
number CPU08RM/AD) for a description of the instructions and
addressing modes and more detail about the architecture of the CPU.
6.6 Low-Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low powerconsumption standby modes.
6.6.1 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction:
•
Clears the interrupt mask (I bit) in the condition code register,
enabling interrupts. After exit from wait mode by interrupt, the I bit
remains clear. After exit by reset, the I bit is set.
•
Disables the CPU clock
6.6.2 Stop Mode
The STOP instruction:
•
Clears the interrupt mask (I bit) in the condition code register,
enabling external interrupts. After exit from stop mode by external
interrupt, the I bit remains clear. After exit by reset, the I bit is set.
•
Disables the CPU clock
After exiting stop mode, the CPU clock begins running after the oscillator
stabilization delay.
Technical Data
64
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
CPU During Break Interrupts
6.7 CPU During Break Interrupts
If a break module is present on the MCU, the CPU starts a break
interrupt by:
•
Loading the instruction register with the SWI instruction
•
Loading the program counter with $FFFC:$FFFD or with
$FEFC:$FEFD in monitor mode
The break interrupt begins after completion of the CPU instruction in
progress. If the break address register match occurs on the last cycle of
a CPU instruction, the break interrupt begins immediately.
A return-from-interrupt instruction (RTI) in the break routine ends the
break interrupt and returns the MCU to normal operation if the break
interrupt has been deasserted.
6.8 Instruction Set Summary
Table 6-1 provides a summary of the M68HC08 instruction set.
6.9 Opcode Map
The opcode map is provided in Table 6-2.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
65
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
V H I N Z C
ADC #opr
ADC opr
ADC opr
ADC opr,X
ADC opr,X
ADC ,X
ADC opr,SP
ADC opr,SP
A ← (A) + (M) + (C)
Add with Carry
↕ ↕
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
– ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
A9
B9
C9
D9
E9
F9
9EE9
9ED9
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
– ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
AB
BB
CB
DB
EB
FB
9EEB
9EDB
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
ADD #opr
ADD opr
ADD opr
ADD opr,X
ADD opr,X
ADD ,X
ADD opr,SP
ADD opr,SP
Add without Carry
AIS #opr
Add Immediate Value (Signed) to SP
SP ← (SP) + (16 « M)
– – – – – – IMM
AIX #opr
Add Immediate Value (Signed) to H:X
H:X ← (H:X) + (16 « M)
– – – – – – IMM
AND #opr
AND opr
AND opr
AND opr,X
AND opr,X
AND ,X
AND opr,SP
AND opr,SP
ASL opr
ASLA
ASLX
ASL opr,X
ASL ,X
ASL opr,SP
Arithmetic Shift Left
(Same as LSL)
Arithmetic Shift Right
BCC rel
Branch if Carry Bit Clear
Technical Data
66
C
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 0
Mn ← 0
A7
ii
2
AF
ii
2
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
DIR
INH
INH
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
38
48
58
68
78
9E68
dd
DIR
INH
INH
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
37
47
57
67
77
9E67
dd
ff
4
1
1
4
3
5
– – – – – – REL
24
rr
3
DIR (b0)
DIR (b1)
DIR (b2)
DIR (b3)
– – – – – –
DIR (b4)
DIR (b5)
DIR (b6)
DIR (b7)
11
13
15
17
19
1B
1D
1F
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
↕
C
ff
ee ff
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
A4
B4
C4
D4
E4
F4
9EE4
9ED4
b0
b0
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
–
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
0 – – ↕ ↕
0
b7
b7
Clear Bit n in M
↕ ↕
A ← (A) & (M)
Logical AND
ASR opr
ASRA
ASRX
ASR opr,X
ASR opr,X
ASR opr,SP
BCLR n, opr
A ← (A) + (M)
ff
ee ff
Cycles
Effect on
CCR
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
↕
ff
ee ff
ff
ff
ff
4
1
1
4
3
5
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Opcode Map
Effect on
CCR
V H I N Z C
Cycles
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
BCS rel
Branch if Carry Bit Set (Same as BLO)
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 1
– – – – – – REL
25
rr
3
BEQ rel
Branch if Equal
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (Z) = 1
– – – – – – REL
27
rr
3
BGE opr
Branch if Greater Than or Equal To
(Signed Operands)
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N ⊕ V) = 0
– – – – – – REL
90
rr
3
BGT opr
Branch if Greater Than (Signed
Operands)
PC ← (PC) + 2 +rel ? (Z) | (N ⊕ V)=0 – – – – – – REL
92
rr
3
BHCC rel
Branch if Half Carry Bit Clear
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (H) = 0
– – – – – – REL
28
rr
3
BHCS rel
Branch if Half Carry Bit Set
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (H) = 1
– – – – – – REL
29
rr
BHI rel
Branch if Higher
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) | (Z) = 0
– – – – – – REL
22
rr
3
BHS rel
Branch if Higher or Same
(Same as BCC)
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 0
– – – – – – REL
24
rr
3
BIH rel
Branch if IRQ Pin High
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? IRQ = 1
– – – – – – REL
2F
rr
3
BIL rel
Branch if IRQ Pin Low
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? IRQ = 0
– – – – – – REL
2E
rr
3
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
ff
ee ff
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
93
rr
3
BIT #opr
BIT opr
BIT opr
BIT opr,X
BIT opr,X
BIT ,X
BIT opr,SP
BIT opr,SP
Bit Test
BLE opr
Branch if Less Than or Equal To
(Signed Operands)
BLO rel
Branch if Lower (Same as BCS)
BLS rel
(A) & (M)
0 – – ↕ ↕
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
–
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (Z) | (N ⊕ V)=1 – – – – – – REL
A5
B5
C5
D5
E5
F5
9EE5
9ED5
3
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 1
– – – – – – REL
25
rr
3
Branch if Lower or Same
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) | (Z) = 1
– – – – – – REL
23
rr
3
BLT opr
Branch if Less Than (Signed Operands)
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N ⊕ V) = 1
– – – – – – REL
91
rr
3
BMC rel
Branch if Interrupt Mask Clear
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (I) = 0
– – – – – – REL
2C
rr
3
BMI rel
Branch if Minus
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N) = 1
– – – – – – REL
2B
rr
3
BMS rel
Branch if Interrupt Mask Set
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (I) = 1
– – – – – – REL
2D
rr
3
BNE rel
Branch if Not Equal
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (Z) = 0
– – – – – – REL
26
rr
3
BPL rel
Branch if Plus
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N) = 0
– – – – – – REL
2A
rr
3
BRA rel
Branch Always
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel
– – – – – – REL
20
rr
3
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
67
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
DIR (b0)
DIR (b1)
DIR (b2)
DIR (b3)
– – – – – ↕
DIR (b4)
DIR (b5)
DIR (b6)
DIR (b7)
01
03
05
07
09
0B
0D
0F
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
– – – – – – REL
21
rr
3
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (Mn) = 1
DIR (b0)
DIR (b1)
DIR (b2)
DIR (b3)
– – – – – ↕
DIR (b4)
DIR (b5)
DIR (b6)
DIR (b7)
00
02
04
06
08
0A
0C
0E
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
dd rr
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Mn ← 1
DIR (b0)
DIR (b1)
DIR (b2)
DIR (b3)
– – – – – –
DIR (b4)
DIR (b5)
DIR (b6)
DIR (b7)
10
12
14
16
18
1A
1C
1E
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
– – – – – – REL
AD
rr
4
dd rr
ii rr
ii rr
ff rr
rr
ff rr
5
4
4
5
4
6
Description
V H I N Z C
BRCLR n,opr,rel Branch if Bit n in M Clear
BRN rel
Branch Never
BRSET n,opr,rel Branch if Bit n in M Set
BSET n,opr
BSR rel
Set Bit n in M
Branch to Subroutine
CBEQ opr,rel
CBEQA #opr,rel
CBEQX #opr,rel
Compare and Branch if Equal
CBEQ opr,X+,rel
CBEQ X+,rel
CBEQ opr,SP,rel
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (Mn) = 0
PC ← (PC) + 2
PC ← (PC) + 2; push (PCL)
SP ← (SP) – 1; push (PCH)
SP ← (SP) – 1
PC ← (PC) + rel
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (A) – (M) = $00
DIR
IMM
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (A) – (M) = $00
IMM
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (X) – (M) = $00
– – – – – –
IX1+
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (A) – (M) = $00
IX+
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (A) – (M) = $00
PC ← (PC) + 4 + rel ? (A) – (M) = $00
SP1
31
41
51
61
71
9E61
Cycles
Operand
Effect on
CCR
Opcode
Operation
Address
Mode
Source
Form
CLC
Clear Carry Bit
C←0
– – – – – 0 INH
98
1
CLI
Clear Interrupt Mask
I←0
– – 0 – – – INH
9A
2
M ← $00
A ← $00
X ← $00
H ← $00
M ← $00
M ← $00
M ← $00
DIR
INH
INH
0 – – 0 1 – INH
IX1
IX
SP1
3F
4F
5F
8C
6F
7F
9E6F
CLR opr
CLRA
CLRX
CLRH
CLR opr,X
CLR ,X
CLR opr,SP
Technical Data
68
Clear
dd
ff
ff
3
1
1
1
3
2
4
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Opcode Map
V H I N Z C
CMP #opr
CMP opr
CMP opr
CMP opr,X
CMP opr,X
CMP ,X
CMP opr,SP
CMP opr,SP
Compare A with M
(A) – (M)
COM opr
COMA
COMX
COM opr,X
COM ,X
COM opr,SP
Complement (One’s Complement)
CPHX #opr
CPHX opr
Compare H:X with M
CPX #opr
CPX opr
CPX opr
CPX ,X
CPX opr,X
CPX opr,X
CPX opr,SP
CPX opr,SP
Compare X with M
DAA
Decimal Adjust A
(H:X) – (M:M + 1)
(X) – (M)
(A)10
DBNZ opr,rel
DBNZA rel
Decrement and Branch if Not Zero
DBNZX rel
DBNZ opr,X,rel
DBNZ X,rel
DBNZ opr,SP,rel
DEC opr
DECA
DECX
DEC opr,X
DEC ,X
DEC opr,SP
Decrement
DIV
Divide
M ← (M) = $FF – (M)
A ← (A) = $FF – (M)
X ← (X) = $FF – (M)
M ← (M) = $FF – (M)
M ← (M) = $FF – (M)
M ← (M) = $FF – (M)
A1
B1
C1
D1
E1
F1
9EE1
9ED1
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
DIR
INH
INH
1
IX1
IX
SP1
33
43
53
63
73
9E63
dd
0 – – ↕ ↕
IMM
DIR
↕
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
↕
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
U – – ↕ ↕ ↕ INH
A ← (A)–1 or M ← (M)–1 or X ← (X)–1
DIR
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (result) ≠ 0
INH
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (result) ≠ 0
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (result) ≠ 0
– – – – – – INH
IX1
PC ← (PC) + 3 + rel ? (result) ≠ 0
IX
PC ← (PC) + 2 + rel ? (result) ≠ 0
SP1
PC ← (PC) + 4 + rel ? (result) ≠ 0
M ← (M) – 1
A ← (A) – 1
X ← (X) – 1
M ← (M) – 1
M ← (M) – 1
M ← (M) – 1
A ← (H:A)/(X)
H ← Remainder
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
↕
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
↕
– – ↕ ↕
DIR
INH
INH
–
IX1
IX
SP1
– – – – ↕ ↕ INH
ff
ee ff
Cycles
Effect on
CCR
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
ff
4
1
1
4
3
5
65
75
ii ii+1
dd
3
4
A3
B3
C3
D3
E3
F3
9EE3
9ED3
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
ff
ff
ee ff
72
2
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
9E6B
dd rr
rr
rr
ff rr
rr
ff rr
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
9E6A
dd
52
ff
ff
5
3
3
5
4
6
4
1
1
4
3
5
7
Technical Data
69
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
V H I N Z C
EOR #opr
EOR opr
EOR opr
EOR opr,X
EOR opr,X
EOR ,X
EOR opr,SP
EOR opr,SP
INC opr
INCA
INCX
INC opr,X
INC ,X
INC opr,SP
JMP opr
JMP opr
JMP opr,X
JMP opr,X
JMP ,X
JSR opr
JSR opr
JSR opr,X
JSR opr,X
JSR ,X
Load A from M
LDHX #opr
LDHX opr
Load H:X from M
LSL opr
LSLA
LSLX
LSL opr,X
LSL ,X
LSL opr,SP
Technical Data
70
– – ↕ ↕
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
DIR
INH
INH
–
IX1
IX
SP1
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
9E6C
dd
ff
ee ff
ff
ff
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
4
1
1
4
3
5
PC ← Jump Address
BC
CC
DC
EC
FC
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
2
3
4
3
2
PC ← (PC) + n (n = 1, 2, or 3)
Push (PCL); SP ← (SP) – 1
Push (PCH); SP ← (SP) – 1
PC ← Unconditional Address
DIR
EXT
– – – – – – IX2
IX1
IX
BD
CD
DD
ED
FD
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
4
5
6
5
4
A6
B6
C6
D6
E6
F6
9EE6
9ED6
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
ff
ee ff
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
ii jj
dd
3
4
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
A ← (M)
0 – – ↕ ↕
H:X ← (M:M + 1)
X ← (M)
Load X from M
Logical Shift Left
(Same as ASL)
↕
A8
B8
C8
D8
E8
F8
9EE8
9ED8
DIR
EXT
– – – – – – IX2
IX1
IX
Jump
Jump to Subroutine
0 – – ↕ ↕
M ← (M) + 1
A ← (A) + 1
X ← (X) + 1
M ← (M) + 1
M ← (M) + 1
M ← (M) + 1
Increment
LDA #opr
LDA opr
LDA opr
LDA opr,X
LDA opr,X
LDA ,X
LDA opr,SP
LDA opr,SP
LDX #opr
LDX opr
LDX opr
LDX opr,X
LDX opr,X
LDX ,X
LDX opr,SP
LDX opr,SP
A ← (A ⊕ M)
Exclusive OR M with A
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
–
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
Cycles
Effect on
CCR
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
C
0
b7
IMM
DIR
45
55
0 – – ↕ ↕
–
0 – – ↕ ↕
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
–
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
AE
BE
CE
DE
EE
FE
9EEE
9EDE
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
DIR
INH
INH
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
38
48
58
68
78
9E68
dd
↕
b0
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
–
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
ff
ee ff
ff
ff
4
1
1
4
3
5
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Opcode Map
V H I N Z C
LSR opr
LSRA
LSRX
LSR opr,X
LSR ,X
LSR opr,SP
0
Logical Shift Right
C
b7
MOV opr,opr
MOV opr,X+
MOV #opr,opr
MOV X+,opr
Move
MUL
Unsigned multiply
↕
b0
(M)Destination ← (M)Source
H:X ← (H:X) + 1 (IX+D, DIX+)
X:A ← (X) × (A)
DIR
INH
INH
– – 0 ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
0 – – ↕ ↕
DD
DIX+
–
IMD
IX+D
– 0 – – – 0 INH
DIR
INH
INH
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
34
44
54
64
74
9E64
4E
5E
6E
7E
dd
ff
4
1
1
4
3
5
dd dd
dd
ii dd
dd
5
4
4
4
ff
42
30
40
50
60
70
9E60
Cycles
Effect on
CCR
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
5
dd
4
1
1
4
3
5
NEG opr
NEGA
NEGX
NEG opr,X
NEG ,X
NEG opr,SP
Negate (Two’s Complement)
NOP
No Operation
None
– – – – – – INH
9D
1
NSA
Nibble Swap A
A ← (A[3:0]:A[7:4])
– – – – – – INH
62
3
M ← –(M) = $00 – (M)
A ← –(A) = $00 – (A)
X ← –(X) = $00 – (X)
M ← –(M) = $00 – (M)
M ← –(M) = $00 – (M)
↕
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
–
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
ff
ff
ORA #opr
ORA opr
ORA opr
ORA opr,X
ORA opr,X
ORA ,X
ORA opr,SP
ORA opr,SP
Inclusive OR A and M
PSHA
Push A onto Stack
Push (A); SP ← (SP) – 1
– – – – – – INH
87
2
PSHH
Push H onto Stack
Push (H); SP ← (SP) – 1
– – – – – – INH
8B
2
PSHX
Push X onto Stack
Push (X); SP ← (SP) – 1
– – – – – – INH
89
2
PULA
Pull A from Stack
SP ← (SP + 1); Pull (A)
– – – – – – INH
86
2
PULH
Pull H from Stack
SP ← (SP + 1); Pull (H)
– – – – – – INH
8A
2
PULX
Pull X from Stack
SP ← (SP + 1); Pull (X)
– – – – – – INH
88
2
ROL opr
ROLA
ROLX
ROL opr,X
ROL ,X
ROL opr,SP
A ← (A) | (M)
0 – – ↕ ↕
↕
C
Rotate Left through Carry
b7
b0
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
DIR
INH
INH
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
AA
BA
CA
DA
EA
FA
9EEA
9EDA
39
49
59
69
79
9E69
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
ff
ee ff
dd
ff
ff
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
4
1
1
4
3
5
Technical Data
71
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
V H I N Z C
36
46
56
66
76
9E66
dd
4
1
1
4
3
5
ROR opr
RORA
RORX
ROR opr,X
ROR ,X
ROR opr,SP
Rotate Right through Carry
RSP
Reset Stack Pointer
SP ← $FF
– – – – – – INH
9C
1
RTI
Return from Interrupt
SP ← (SP) + 1; Pull (CCR)
SP ← (SP) + 1; Pull (A)
SP ← (SP) + 1; Pull (X)
SP ← (SP) + 1; Pull (PCH)
SP ← (SP) + 1; Pull (PCL)
↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ INH
80
7
RTS
Return from Subroutine
SP ← SP + 1; Pull (PCH)
SP ← SP + 1; Pull (PCL)
– – – – – – INH
81
4
↕
C
b7
b0
DIR
INH
INH
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
Cycles
Effect on
CCR
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
A2
B2
C2
D2
E2
F2
9EE2
9ED2
ff
ff
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
SBC #opr
SBC opr
SBC opr
SBC opr,X
SBC opr,X
SBC ,X
SBC opr,SP
SBC opr,SP
Subtract with Carry
SEC
Set Carry Bit
C←1
– – – – – 1 INH
99
1
SEI
Set Interrupt Mask
I←1
– – 1 – – – INH
9B
2
STA opr
STA opr
STA opr,X
STA opr,X
STA ,X
STA opr,SP
STA opr,SP
Store A in M
STHX opr
Store H:X in M
STOP
Enable IRQ Pin; Stop Oscillator
STX opr
STX opr
STX opr,X
STX opr,X
STX ,X
STX opr,SP
STX opr,SP
Technical Data
72
Store X in M
A ← (A) – (M) – (C)
↕
M ← (A)
DIR
EXT
IX2
– IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
9EE7
9ED7
– DIR
35
– – 0 – – – INH
8E
0 – – ↕ ↕
(M:M + 1) ← (H:X)
0 – – ↕ ↕
I ← 0; Stop Oscillator
M ← (X)
0 – – ↕ ↕
DIR
EXT
IX2
– IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
BF
CF
DF
EF
FF
9EEF
9EDF
ff
ee ff
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
ff
ee ff
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
dd
4
1
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
ff
ee ff
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Opcode Map
V H I N Z C
SUB #opr
SUB opr
SUB opr
SUB opr,X
SUB opr,X
SUB ,X
SUB opr,SP
SUB opr,SP
A ← (A) – (M)
Subtract
↕
IMM
DIR
EXT
IX2
– – ↕ ↕ ↕
IX1
IX
SP1
SP2
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
9EE0
9ED0
ii
dd
hh ll
ee ff
ff
ff
ee ff
Cycles
Effect on
CCR
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
2
3
4
4
3
2
4
5
SWI
Software Interrupt
PC ← (PC) + 1; Push (PCL)
SP ← (SP) – 1; Push (PCH)
SP ← (SP) – 1; Push (X)
SP ← (SP) – 1; Push (A)
SP ← (SP) – 1; Push (CCR)
SP ← (SP) – 1; I ← 1
PCH ← Interrupt Vector High Byte
PCL ← Interrupt Vector Low Byte
TAP
Transfer A to CCR
CCR ← (A)
↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ INH
84
2
TAX
Transfer A to X
X ← (A)
– – – – – – INH
97
1
TPA
Transfer CCR to A
A ← (CCR)
– – – – – – INH
85
1
TST opr
TSTA
TSTX
TST opr,X
TST ,X
TST opr,SP
Test for Negative or Zero
TSX
Transfer SP to H:X
TXA
Transfer X to A
TXS
Transfer H:X to SP
(A) – $00 or (X) – $00 or (M) – $00
83
9
0 – – ↕ ↕
DIR
INH
INH
–
IX1
IX
SP1
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
9E6D
dd
ff
ff
3
1
1
3
2
4
H:X ← (SP) + 1
– – – – – – INH
95
2
A ← (X)
– – – – – – INH
9F
1
(SP) ← (H:X) – 1
– – – – – – INH
94
2
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
– – 1 – – – INH
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
73
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
V H I N Z C
A
C
CCR
dd
dd rr
DD
DIR
DIX+
ee ff
EXT
ff
H
H
hh ll
I
ii
IMD
IMM
INH
IX
IX+
IX+D
IX1
IX1+
IX2
M
N
Accumulator
Carry/borrow bit
Condition code register
Direct address of operand
Direct address of operand and relative offset of branch instruction
Direct to direct addressing mode
Direct addressing mode
Direct to indexed with post increment addressing mode
High and low bytes of offset in indexed, 16-bit offset addressing
Extended addressing mode
Offset byte in indexed, 8-bit offset addressing
Half-carry bit
Index register high byte
High and low bytes of operand address in extended addressing
Interrupt mask
Immediate operand byte
Immediate source to direct destination addressing mode
Immediate addressing mode
Inherent addressing mode
Indexed, no offset addressing mode
Indexed, no offset, post increment addressing mode
Indexed with post increment to direct addressing mode
Indexed, 8-bit offset addressing mode
Indexed, 8-bit offset, post increment addressing mode
Indexed, 16-bit offset addressing mode
Memory location
Negative bit
Technical Data
74
n
opr
PC
PCH
PCL
REL
rel
rr
SP1
SP2
SP
U
V
X
Z
&
|
⊕
()
–( )
#
«
←
?
:
↕
—
Cycles
Effect on
CCR
Description
Operand
Operation
Opcode
Source
Form
Address
Mode
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary
Any bit
Operand (one or two bytes)
Program counter
Program counter high byte
Program counter low byte
Relative addressing mode
Relative program counter offset byte
Relative program counter offset byte
Stack pointer, 8-bit offset addressing mode
Stack pointer 16-bit offset addressing mode
Stack pointer
Undefined
Overflow bit
Index register low byte
Zero bit
Logical AND
Logical OR
Logical EXCLUSIVE OR
Contents of
Negation (two’s complement)
Immediate value
Sign extend
Loaded with
If
Concatenated with
Set or cleared
Not affected
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Table 6-2. Opcode Map
Bit Manipulation
DIR
DIR
MSB
Branch
REL
DIR
INH
3
4
0
1
2
5
BRSET0
3 DIR
5
BRCLR0
3 DIR
5
BRSET1
3 DIR
5
BRCLR1
3 DIR
5
BRSET2
3 DIR
5
BRCLR2
3 DIR
5
BRSET3
3 DIR
5
BRCLR3
3 DIR
5
BRSET4
3 DIR
5
BRCLR4
3 DIR
5
BRSET5
3 DIR
5
BRCLR5
3 DIR
5
BRSET6
3 DIR
5
BRCLR6
3 DIR
5
BRSET7
3 DIR
5
BRCLR7
3 DIR
4
BSET0
2 DIR
4
BCLR0
2 DIR
4
BSET1
2 DIR
4
BCLR1
2 DIR
4
BSET2
2 DIR
4
BCLR2
2 DIR
4
BSET3
2 DIR
4
BCLR3
2 DIR
4
BSET4
2 DIR
4
BCLR4
2 DIR
4
BSET5
2 DIR
4
BCLR5
2 DIR
4
BSET6
2 DIR
4
BCLR6
2 DIR
4
BSET7
2 DIR
4
BCLR7
2 DIR
3
BRA
2 REL
3
BRN
2 REL
3
BHI
2 REL
3
BLS
2 REL
3
BCC
2 REL
3
BCS
2 REL
3
BNE
2 REL
3
BEQ
2 REL
3
BHCC
2 REL
3
BHCS
2 REL
3
BPL
2 REL
3
BMI
2 REL
3
BMC
2 REL
3
BMS
2 REL
3
BIL
2 REL
3
BIH
2 REL
Read-Modify-Write
INH
IX1
5
6
1
NEGX
1 INH
4
CBEQX
3 IMM
7
DIV
1 INH
1
COMX
1 INH
1
LSRX
1 INH
4
LDHX
2 DIR
1
RORX
1 INH
1
ASRX
1 INH
1
LSLX
1 INH
1
ROLX
1 INH
1
DECX
1 INH
3
DBNZX
2 INH
1
INCX
1 INH
1
TSTX
1 INH
4
MOV
2 DIX+
1
CLRX
1 INH
4
NEG
2
IX1
5
CBEQ
3 IX1+
3
NSA
1 INH
4
COM
2 IX1
4
LSR
2 IX1
3
CPHX
3 IMM
4
ROR
2 IX1
4
ASR
2 IX1
4
LSL
2 IX1
4
ROL
2 IX1
4
DEC
2 IX1
5
DBNZ
3 IX1
4
INC
2 IX1
3
TST
2 IX1
4
MOV
3 IMD
3
CLR
2 IX1
SP1
IX
9E6
7
Control
INH
INH
8
9
Register/Memory
IX2
SP2
IMM
DIR
EXT
A
B
C
D
4
SUB
3 EXT
4
CMP
3 EXT
4
SBC
3 EXT
4
CPX
3 EXT
4
AND
3 EXT
4
BIT
3 EXT
4
LDA
3 EXT
4
STA
3 EXT
4
EOR
3 EXT
4
ADC
3 EXT
4
ORA
3 EXT
4
ADD
3 EXT
3
JMP
3 EXT
5
JSR
3 EXT
4
LDX
3 EXT
4
STX
3 EXT
4
SUB
IX2
4
CMP
IX2
4
SBC
IX2
4
CPX
IX2
4
AND
IX2
4
BIT
IX2
4
LDA
IX2
4
STA
IX2
4
EOR
IX2
4
ADC
IX2
4
ORA
IX2
4
ADD
IX2
4
JMP
IX2
6
JSR
IX2
4
LDX
IX2
4
STX
IX2
9ED
IX1
SP1
IX
E
9EE
F
LSB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E
F
Technical Data
75
INH Inherent
REL Relative
IMM Immediate
IX
Indexed, No Offset
DIR Direct
IX1 Indexed, 8-Bit Offset
EXT Extended
IX2 Indexed, 16-Bit Offset
DD Direct-Direct
IMD Immediate-Direct
IX+D Indexed-Direct DIX+ Direct-Indexed
*Pre-byte for stack pointer indexed instructions
5
3
NEG
NEG
3 SP1 1 IX
6
4
CBEQ
CBEQ
4 SP1 2 IX+
2
DAA
1 INH
5
3
COM
COM
3 SP1 1 IX
5
3
LSR
LSR
3 SP1 1 IX
4
CPHX
2 DIR
5
3
ROR
ROR
3 SP1 1 IX
5
3
ASR
ASR
3 SP1 1 IX
5
3
LSL
LSL
3 SP1 1 IX
5
3
ROL
ROL
3 SP1 1 IX
5
3
DEC
DEC
3 SP1 1 IX
6
4
DBNZ
DBNZ
4 SP1 2 IX
5
3
INC
INC
3 SP1 1 IX
4
2
TST
TST
3 SP1 1 IX
4
MOV
2 IX+D
4
2
CLR
CLR
3 SP1 1 IX
SP1 Stack Pointer, 8-Bit Offset
SP2 Stack Pointer, 16-Bit Offset
IX+ Indexed, No Offset with
Post Increment
IX1+ Indexed, 1-Byte Offset with
Post Increment
7
3
RTI
BGE
1 INH 2 REL
4
3
RTS
BLT
1 INH 2 REL
3
BGT
2 REL
9
3
SWI
BLE
1 INH 2 REL
2
2
TAP
TXS
1 INH 1 INH
1
2
TPA
TSX
1 INH 1 INH
2
PULA
1 INH
2
1
PSHA
TAX
1 INH 1 INH
2
1
PULX
CLC
1 INH 1 INH
2
1
PSHX
SEC
1 INH 1 INH
2
2
PULH
CLI
1 INH 1 INH
2
2
PSHH
SEI
1 INH 1 INH
1
1
CLRH
RSP
1 INH 1 INH
1
NOP
1 INH
1
STOP
*
1 INH
1
1
WAIT
TXA
1 INH 1 INH
2
SUB
2 IMM
2
CMP
2 IMM
2
SBC
2 IMM
2
CPX
2 IMM
2
AND
2 IMM
2
BIT
2 IMM
2
LDA
2 IMM
2
AIS
2 IMM
2
EOR
2 IMM
2
ADC
2 IMM
2
ORA
2 IMM
2
ADD
2 IMM
3
SUB
2 DIR
3
CMP
2 DIR
3
SBC
2 DIR
3
CPX
2 DIR
3
AND
2 DIR
3
BIT
2 DIR
3
LDA
2 DIR
3
STA
2 DIR
3
EOR
2 DIR
3
ADC
2 DIR
3
ORA
2 DIR
3
ADD
2 DIR
2
JMP
2 DIR
4
4
BSR
JSR
2 REL 2 DIR
2
3
LDX
LDX
2 IMM 2 DIR
2
3
AIX
STX
2 IMM 2 DIR
MSB
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
SUB
SP2
5
CMP
SP2
5
SBC
SP2
5
CPX
SP2
5
AND
SP2
5
BIT
SP2
5
LDA
SP2
5
STA
SP2
5
EOR
SP2
5
ADC
SP2
5
ORA
SP2
5
ADD
SP2
3
SUB
2 IX1
3
CMP
2 IX1
3
SBC
2 IX1
3
CPX
2 IX1
3
AND
2 IX1
3
BIT
2 IX1
3
LDA
2 IX1
3
STA
2 IX1
3
EOR
2 IX1
3
ADC
2 IX1
3
ORA
2 IX1
3
ADD
2 IX1
3
JMP
2 IX1
5
JSR
2 IX1
5
3
LDX
LDX
SP2 2 IX1
5
3
STX
STX
SP2 2 IX1
4
SUB
3 SP1
4
CMP
3 SP1
4
SBC
3 SP1
4
CPX
3 SP1
4
AND
3 SP1
4
BIT
3 SP1
4
LDA
3 SP1
4
STA
3 SP1
4
EOR
3 SP1
4
ADC
3 SP1
4
ORA
3 SP1
4
ADD
3 SP1
2
SUB
1 IX
2
CMP
1 IX
2
SBC
1 IX
2
CPX
1 IX
2
AND
1 IX
2
BIT
1 IX
2
LDA
1 IX
2
STA
1 IX
2
EOR
1 IX
2
ADC
1 IX
2
ORA
1 IX
2
ADD
1 IX
2
JMP
1 IX
4
JSR
1 IX
4
2
LDX
LDX
3 SP1 1 IX
4
2
STX
STX
3 SP1 1 IX
High Byte of Opcode in Hexadecimal
LSB
Low Byte of Opcode in Hexadecimal
0
5
Cycles
BRSET0 Opcode Mnemonic
3 DIR Number of Bytes / Addressing Mode
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Opcode Map
D
4
1
NEG
NEGA
2 DIR 1 INH
5
4
CBEQ CBEQA
3 DIR 3 IMM
5
MUL
1 INH
4
1
COM
COMA
2 DIR 1 INH
4
1
LSR
LSRA
2 DIR 1 INH
4
3
STHX
LDHX
2 DIR 3 IMM
4
1
ROR
RORA
2 DIR 1 INH
4
1
ASR
ASRA
2 DIR 1 INH
4
1
LSL
LSLA
2 DIR 1 INH
4
1
ROL
ROLA
2 DIR 1 INH
4
1
DEC
DECA
2 DIR 1 INH
5
3
DBNZ DBNZA
3 DIR 2 INH
4
1
INC
INCA
2 DIR 1 INH
3
1
TST
TSTA
2 DIR 1 INH
5
MOV
3 DD
3
1
CLR
CLRA
2 DIR 1 INH
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data
76
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM)
7.1 Contents
7.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.3
SIM Bus Clock Control and Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.3.1
Bus Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.3.2
Clock Start-Up from POR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.3.3
Clocks in Stop Mode and Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.4
Reset and System Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.4.1
External Pin Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.4.2
Active Resets from Internal Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.4.2.1
Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.4.2.2
Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset. . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.4.2.3
Illegal Opcode Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.4.2.4
Illegal Address Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.4.2.5
LVI Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
7.5
SIM Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.5.1
SIM Counter During Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.5.2
SIM Counter During Stop Mode Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.5.3
SIM Counter and Reset States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
7.6
Exception Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.6.1
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.6.1.1
Hardware Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.6.1.2
SWI Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.6.2
Interrupt Status Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.6.2.1
Interrupt Status Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.6.2.2
Interrupt Status Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.6.2.3
Interrupt Status Register 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.6.3
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.6.4
Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
7.6.5
Status Flag Protection in Break Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
77
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.7
Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
7.7.1
Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.7.2
Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.8
SIM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.8.1
Break Status Register (BSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.8.2
Reset Status Register (RSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.8.3
Break Flag Control Register (BFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.2 Introduction
This section describes the system integration module (SIM), which
supports up to 24 external and/or internal interrupts. Together with the
CPU, the SIM controls all MCU activities. A block diagram of the SIM is
shown in Figure 7-1. Figure 7-2 is a summary of the SIM I/O registers.
The SIM is a system state controller that coordinates CPU and exception
timing. The SIM is responsible for:
•
Bus clock generation and control for CPU and peripherals
– Stop/wait/reset/break entry and recovery
– Internal clock control
•
Master reset control, including power-on reset (POR) and COP
timeout
•
Interrupt control:
– Acknowledge timing
– Arbitration control timing
– Vector address generation
Technical Data
78
•
CPU enable/disable timing
•
Modular architecture expandable to 128 interrupt sources
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Introduction
MODULE STOP
MODULE WAIT
CPU STOP (FROM CPU)
CPU WAIT (FROM CPU)
STOP/WAIT
CONTROL
SIMOSCEN (TO OSCILLATOR)
SIM
COUNTER
COP CLOCK
2OSCOUT (FROM OSCILLATOR)
OSCOUT (FROM OSCILLATOR)
÷2
VDD
INTERNAL
PULL-UP
RESET
PIN LOGIC
CLOCK
CONTROL
CLOCK GENERATORS
POR CONTROL
MASTER
RESET
CONTROL
RESET PIN CONTROL
SIM RESET STATUS REGISTER
INTERNAL CLOCKS
ILLEGAL OPCODE (FROM CPU)
ILLEGAL ADDRESS (FROM ADDRESS
MAP DECODERS)
COP TIMEOUT (FROM COP MODULE)
USB RESET (FROM USB MODULE)
RESET
INTERRUPT SOURCES
INTERRUPT CONTROL
AND PRIORITY DECODE
CPU INTERFACE
Figure 7-1. SIM Block Diagram
Table 7-1. Signal Name Conventions
Signal Name
Description
2OSCOUT
Buffered clock from the X-tal oscillator circuit or the RC oscillator circuit.
OSCOUT
The 2OSCOUT frequency divided by two. This signal is again divided by two in the
SIM to generate the internal bus clocks. (Bus clock = 2OSCOUT ÷ 4)
IAB
Internal address bus
IDB
Internal data bus
PORRST
Signal from the power-on reset module to the SIM
IRST
Internal reset signal
R/W
Read/write signal
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
79
System Integration Module (SIM)
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
R
R
R
R
R
R
Read:
$FE00
Break Status Register
Write:
(BSR)
Reset:
1
Bit 0
SBSW
R
NOTE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
POR
PIN
COP
ILOP
ILAD
MODRST
LVI
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
BCFE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
IF5
IF4
IF3
0
IF1
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IF14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IF15
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note: Writing a logic 0 clears SBSW.
Read:
$FE01
Reset Status Register
Write:
(RSR)
POR:
Read:
$FE02
Reserved Write:
Reset:
$FE03
Read:
Break Flag Control
Register Write:
(BFCR)
Reset:
Read:
$FE04
Interrupt Status Register 1
Write:
(INT1)
Reset:
Read:
$FE05
Interrupt Status Register 2
Write:
(INT2)
Reset:
Read:
$FE06
Interrupt Status Register 3
Write:
(INT3)
Reset:
0
= Unimplemented
R
= Reserved
Figure 7-2. SIM I/O Register Summary
Technical Data
80
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
SIM Bus Clock Control and Generation
7.3 SIM Bus Clock Control and Generation
The bus clock generator provides system clock signals for the CPU and
peripherals on the MCU. The system clocks are generated from an
incoming clock, OSCOUT, as shown in Figure 7-3.
From
OSCILLATOR
2OSCOUT
From
OSCILLATOR
OSCOUT
SIM COUNTER
÷2
BUS CLOCK
GENERATORS
SIM
Figure 7-3. SIM Clock Signals
7.3.1 Bus Timing
In user mode, the internal bus frequency is the oscillator frequency
(2OSCOUT) divided by four.
7.3.2 Clock Start-Up from POR
When the power-on reset module generates a reset, the clocks to the
CPU and peripherals are inactive and held in an inactive phase until after
the 4096 2OSCOUT cycle POR time-out has completed. The RST pin is
driven low by the SIM during this entire period. The IBUS clocks start
upon completion of the time-out.
7.3.3 Clocks in Stop Mode and Wait Mode
Upon exit from stop mode by an interrupt, break, or reset, the SIM allows
2OSCOUT to clock the SIM counter. The CPU and peripheral clocks do
not become active until after the stop delay time-out. This time-out is
selectable as 4096 or 32 2OSCOUT cycles. (See 7.7.2 Stop Mode.)
In wait mode, the CPU clocks are inactive. The SIM also produces two
sets of clocks for other modules. Refer to the wait mode subsection of
each module to see if the module is active or inactive in wait mode.
Some modules can be programmed to be active in wait mode.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
81
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.4 Reset and System Initialization
The MCU has these reset sources:
•
Power-on reset module (POR)
•
External reset pin (RST)
•
Computer operating properly module (COP)
•
Low-voltage inhibit module (LVI)
•
Illegal opcode
•
Illegal address
All of these resets produce the vector $FFFE–$FFFF ($FEFE–$FEFF in
Monitor mode) and assert the internal reset signal (IRST). IRST causes
all registers to be returned to their default values and all modules to be
returned to their reset states.
An internal reset clears the SIM counter (see 7.5 SIM Counter), but an
external reset does not. Each of the resets sets a corresponding bit in
the reset status register (RSR). (See 7.8 SIM Registers.)
7.4.1 External Pin Reset
The RST pin circuits include an internal pull-up device. Pulling the
asynchronous RST pin low halts all processing. The PIN bit of the reset
status register (RSR) is set as long as RST is held low for a minimum of
67 2OSCOUT cycles, assuming that the POR was not the source of the
reset. See Table 7-2 for details. Figure 7-4 shows the relative timing.
Table 7-2. PIN Bit Set Timing
Reset Type
Number of Cycles Required to Set PIN
POR
4163 (4096 + 64 + 3)
All others
67 (64 + 3)
2OSCOUT
RST
IAB
VECT H VECT L
PC
Figure 7-4. External Reset Timing
Technical Data
82
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Reset and System Initialization
7.4.2 Active Resets from Internal Sources
All internal reset sources actively pull the RST pin low for 32 2OSCOUT
cycles to allow resetting of external peripherals. The internal reset signal
IRST continues to be asserted for an additional 32 cycles (Figure 7-5).
An internal reset can be caused by an illegal address, illegal opcode,
COP time-out, or POR. (See Figure 7-6 . Sources of Internal Reset.)
Note that for POR resets, the SIM cycles through 4096 2OSCOUT
cycles during which the SIM forces the RST pin low. The internal reset
signal then follows the sequence from the falling edge of RST shown in
Figure 7-5.
IRST
RST PULLED LOW BY MCU
RST
32 CYCLES
32 CYCLES
2OSCOUT
IAB
VECTOR HIGH
Figure 7-5. Internal Reset Timing
The COP reset is asynchronous to the bus clock.
ILLEGAL ADDRESS RST
ILLEGAL OPCODE RST
COPRST
POR
INTERNAL RESET
LVI
Figure 7-6. Sources of Internal Reset
The active reset feature allows the part to issue a reset to peripherals
and other chips within a system built around the MCU.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
83
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.4.2.1 Power-On Reset
When power is first applied to the MCU, the power-on reset module
(POR) generates a pulse to indicate that power-on has occurred. The
external reset pin (RST) is held low while the SIM counter counts out
4096 2OSCOUT cycles. Sixty-four 2OSCOUT cycles later, the CPU and
memories are released from reset to allow the reset vector sequence to
occur.
At power-on, the following events occur:
•
A POR pulse is generated.
•
The internal reset signal is asserted.
•
The SIM enables the oscillator to drive 2OSCOUT.
•
Internal clocks to the CPU and modules are held inactive for 4096
2OSCOUT cycles to allow stabilization of the oscillator.
•
The RST pin is driven low during the oscillator stabilization time.
•
The POR bit of the reset status register (RSR) is set and all other
bits in the register are cleared.
OSC1
PORRST
4096
CYCLES
32
CYCLES
32
CYCLES
2OSCOUT
OSCOUT
RST
$FFFE
IAB
$FFFF
Figure 7-7. POR Recovery
Technical Data
84
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Reset and System Initialization
7.4.2.2 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset
An input to the SIM is reserved for the COP reset signal. The overflow of
the COP counter causes an internal reset and sets the COP bit in the
reset status register (RSR). The SIM actively pulls down the RST pin for
all internal reset sources.
To prevent a COP module time-out, write any value to location $FFFF.
Writing to location $FFFF clears the COP counter and stages 12 through
5 of the SIM counter. The SIM counter output, which occurs at least
every (212 – 24) 2OSCOUT cycles, drives the COP counter. The COP
should be serviced as soon as possible out of reset to guarantee the
maximum amount of time before the first time-out.
The COP module is disabled if the RST pin or the IRQ1 pin is held at
VDD + VHI while the MCU is in monitor mode. The COP module can be
disabled only through combinational logic conditioned with the high
voltage signal on the RST or the IRQ1 pin. This prevents the COP from
becoming disabled as a result of external noise. During a break state,
VDD + VHI on the RST pin disables the COP module.
7.4.2.3 Illegal Opcode Reset
The SIM decodes signals from the CPU to detect illegal instructions. An
illegal instruction sets the ILOP bit in the reset status register (RSR) and
causes a reset.
If the stop enable bit, STOP, in the mask option register is logic zero, the
SIM treats the STOP instruction as an illegal opcode and causes an
illegal opcode reset. The SIM actively pulls down the RST pin for all
internal reset sources.
7.4.2.4 Illegal Address Reset
An opcode fetch from an unmapped address generates an illegal
address reset. The SIM verifies that the CPU is fetching an opcode prior
to asserting the ILAD bit in the reset status register (RSR) and resetting
the MCU. A data fetch from an unmapped address does not generate a
reset. The SIM actively pulls down the RST pin for all internal reset
sources.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
85
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.4.2.5 LVI Reset
The low-voltage inhibit module (LVI) asserts its output to the SIM when
the VDD voltage falls to the LVI trip voltage VTRIP. The LVI bit in the SIM
reset status register (SRSR) is set, and the external reset pin (RSTB) is
held low while the SIM counter counts out 4096 2OSCOUT cycles. Sixtyfour 2OSCOUT cycles later, the CPU and memories are released from
reset to allow the reset vector sequence to occur. The SIM actively pulls
down the (RSTB) pin for all internal reset sources.
7.5 SIM Counter
The SIM counter is used by the power-on reset module (POR) and in
stop mode recovery to allow the oscillator time to stabilize before
enabling the internal bus (IBUS) clocks. The SIM counter also serves as
a prescaler for the computer operating properly module (COP). The SIM
counter uses 12 stages for counting, followed by a 13th stage that
triggers a reset of SIM counters and supplies the clock for the COP
module. The SIM counter is clocked by the falling edge of 2OSCOUT.
7.5.1 SIM Counter During Power-On Reset
The power-on reset module (POR) detects power applied to the MCU.
At power-on, the POR circuit asserts the signal PORRST. Once the SIM
is initialized, it enables the oscillator to drive the bus clock state machine.
7.5.2 SIM Counter During Stop Mode Recovery
The SIM counter also is used for stop mode recovery. The STOP
instruction clears the SIM counter. After an interrupt, break, or reset, the
SIM senses the state of the short stop recovery bit, SSREC, in the mask
option register. If the SSREC bit is a logic one, then the stop recovery is
reduced from the normal delay of 4096 2OSCOUT cycles down to 32
2OSCOUT cycles. This is ideal for applications using canned oscillators
that do not require long start-up times from stop mode. External crystal
applications should use the full stop recovery time, that is, with SSREC
cleared in the configuration register (CONFIG).
Technical Data
86
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Exception Control
7.5.3 SIM Counter and Reset States
External reset has no effect on the SIM counter. (See 7.7.2 Stop Mode
for details.) The SIM counter is free-running after all reset states. (See
7.4.2 Active Resets from Internal Sources for counter control and
internal reset recovery sequences.)
7.6 Exception Control
Normal, sequential program execution can be changed in three different
ways:
•
Interrupts
– Maskable hardware CPU interrupts
– Non-maskable software interrupt instruction (SWI)
•
Reset
•
Break interrupts
7.6.1 Interrupts
An interrupt temporarily changes the sequence of program execution to
respond to a particular event. Figure 7-8 flow charts the handling of
system interrupts.
Interrupts are latched, and arbitration is performed in the SIM at the start
of interrupt processing. The arbitration result is a constant that the CPU
uses to determine which vector to fetch. Once an interrupt is latched by
the SIM, no other interrupt can take precedence, regardless of priority,
until the latched interrupt is serviced (or the I bit is cleared).
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
87
System Integration Module (SIM)
FROM RESET
BREAK
INTERRUPT?
I BIT
SET?
YES
NO
YES
I BIT SET?
NO
IRQ
INTERRUPT?
YES
NO
TIMER
INTERRUPT?
YES
NO
STACK CPU REGISTERS.
SET I BIT.
LOAD PC WITH INTERRUPT VECTOR.
(As many interrupts as exist on chip)
FETCH NEXT
INSTRUCTION
SWI
INSTRUCTION?
YES
NO
RTI
INSTRUCTION?
YES
UNSTACK CPU REGISTERS.
NO
EXECUTE INSTRUCTION.
Figure 7-8. Interrupt Processing
Technical Data
88
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Exception Control
At the beginning of an interrupt, the CPU saves the CPU register
contents on the stack and sets the interrupt mask (I bit) to prevent
additional interrupts. At the end of an interrupt, the RTI instruction
recovers the CPU register contents from the stack so that normal
processing can resume. Figure 7-9 shows interrupt entry timing.
Figure 7-10 shows interrupt recovery timing.
MODULE
INTERRUPT
I BIT
IAB
IDB
DUMMY
SP
DUMMY
SP – 1
SP – 2
PC – 1[7:0] PC – 1[15:8]
SP – 3
X
SP – 4
A
VECT H
CCR
VECT L
V DATA H
START ADDR
V DATA L
OPCODE
R/W
Figure 7-9. Interrupt Entry
MODULE
INTERRUPT
I BIT
IAB
SP – 4
IDB
SP – 3
CCR
SP – 2
A
SP – 1
X
SP
PC
PC – 1[15:8] PC – 1[7:0]
PC + 1
OPCODE
OPERAND
R/W
Figure 7-10. Interrupt Recovery
7.6.1.1 Hardware Interrupts
A hardware interrupt does not stop the current instruction. Processing of
a hardware interrupt begins after completion of the current instruction.
When the current instruction is complete, the SIM checks all pending
hardware interrupts. If interrupts are not masked (I bit clear in the
condition code register), and if the corresponding interrupt enable bit is
set, the SIM proceeds with interrupt processing; otherwise, the next
instruction is fetched and executed.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
89
System Integration Module (SIM)
If more than one interrupt is pending at the end of an instruction
execution, the highest priority interrupt is serviced first. Figure 7-11
demonstrates what happens when two interrupts are pending. If an
interrupt is pending upon exit from the original interrupt service routine,
the pending interrupt is serviced before the LDA instruction is executed.
CLI
LDA #$FF
INT1
BACKGROUND ROUTINE
PSHH
INT1 INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE
PULH
RTI
INT2
PSHH
INT2 INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE
PULH
RTI
Figure 7-11. Interrupt Recognition Example
The LDA opcode is prefetched by both the INT1 and INT2 RTI
instructions. However, in the case of the INT1 RTI prefetch, this is a
redundant operation.
NOTE:
Technical Data
90
To maintain compatibility with the M6805 Family, the H register is not
pushed on the stack during interrupt entry. If the interrupt service routine
modifies the H register or uses the indexed addressing mode, software
should save the H register and then restore it prior to exiting the routine.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Exception Control
7.6.1.2 SWI Instruction
The SWI instruction is a non-maskable instruction that causes an
interrupt regardless of the state of the interrupt mask (I bit) in the
condition code register.
NOTE:
A software interrupt pushes PC onto the stack. A software interrupt does
not push PC – 1, as a hardware interrupt does.
7.6.2 Interrupt Status Registers
The flags in the interrupt status registers identify maskable interrupt
sources. Table 7-3 summarizes the interrupt sources and the interrupt
status register flags that they set. The interrupt status registers can be
useful for debugging.
Table 7-3. Interrupt Sources
Flag
Mask1(1)
INT
Register
Flag
Vector Address
Reset
—
—
—
$FFFE–$FFFF
SWI Instruction
—
—
—
$FFFC–$FFFD
IRQ1 Pin
IRQF1
IMASK1
IF1
$FFFA–$FFFB
Timer Channel 0 Interrupt
CH0F
CH0IE
IF3
$FFF6–$FFF7
Timer Channel 1 Interrupt
CH1F
CH1IE
IF4
$FFF4–$FFF5
TOF
TOIE
IF5
$FFF2–$FFF3
Keyboard Interrupt
KEYF
IMASKK
IF14
$FFE0–$FFE1
ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt
COCO
AIEN
IF15
$FFDE–$FFDF
Source
Priority
Highest
Timer Overflow Interrupt
Lowest
Notes:
1. The I bit in the condition code register is a global mask for all interrupts sources except the SWI instruction.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
91
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.6.2.1 Interrupt Status Register 1
Address:
$FE04
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Read:
0
IF5
IF4
IF3
0
IF1
0
0
Write:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
= Reserved
Figure 7-12. Interrupt Status Register 1 (INT1)
IF1, IF3 to IF5 — Interrupt Flags
These flags indicate the presence of interrupt requests from the
sources shown in Table 7-3.
1 = Interrupt request present
0 = No interrupt request present
Bit 0, 1, 3 and 7 — Always read 0
7.6.2.2 Interrupt Status Register 2
Address:
$FE05
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Read:
IF14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Write:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
= Reserved
Figure 7-13. Interrupt Status Register 2 (INT2)
IF14 — Interrupt Flags
This flag indicates the presence of interrupt requests from the sources
shown in Table 7-3.
1 = Interrupt request present
0 = No interrupt request present
Bit 0 to 6 — Always read 0
Technical Data
92
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Exception Control
7.6.2.3 Interrupt Status Register 3
Address:
$FE06
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Read:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IF15
Write:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
= Reserved
Figure 7-14. Interrupt Status Register 3 (INT3)
IF15 — Interrupt Flags
These flags indicate the presence of interrupt requests from the
sources shown in Table 7-3.
1 = Interrupt request present
0 = No interrupt request present
Bit 1 to 7 — Always read 0
7.6.3 Reset
All reset sources always have equal and highest priority and cannot be
arbitrated.
7.6.4 Break Interrupts
The break module can stop normal program flow at a softwareprogrammable break point by asserting its break interrupt output. (See
Section 17. Break Module (BREAK).) The SIM puts the CPU into the
break state by forcing it to the SWI vector location. Refer to the break
interrupt subsection of each module to see how each module is affected
by the break state.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
93
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.6.5 Status Flag Protection in Break Mode
The SIM controls whether status flags contained in other modules can
be cleared during break mode. The user can select whether flags are
protected from being cleared by properly initializing the break clear flag
enable bit (BCFE) in the break flag control register (BFCR).
Protecting flags in break mode ensures that set flags will not be cleared
while in break mode. This protection allows registers to be freely read
and written during break mode without losing status flag information.
Setting the BCFE bit enables the clearing mechanisms. Once cleared in
break mode, a flag remains cleared even when break mode is exited.
Status flags with a two-step clearing mechanism — for example, a read
of one register followed by the read or write of another — are protected,
even when the first step is accomplished prior to entering break mode.
Upon leaving break mode, execution of the second step will clear the flag
as normal.
7.7 Low-Power Modes
Executing the WAIT or STOP instruction puts the MCU in a low-powerconsumption mode for standby situations. The SIM holds the CPU in a
non-clocked state. The operation of each of these modes is described
below. Both STOP and WAIT clear the interrupt mask (I) in the condition
code register, allowing interrupts to occur.
7.7.1 Wait Mode
In wait mode, the CPU clocks are inactive while the peripheral clocks
continue to run. Figure 7-15 shows the timing for wait mode entry.
A module that is active during wait mode can wake up the CPU with an
interrupt if the interrupt is enabled. Stacking for the interrupt begins one
cycle after the WAIT instruction during which the interrupt occurred. In
wait mode, the CPU clocks are inactive. Refer to the wait mode
subsection of each module to see if the module is active or inactive in
wait mode. Some modules can be programmed to be active in wait
mode.
Technical Data
94
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Low-Power Modes
Wait mode can also be exited by a reset or break. A break interrupt
during wait mode sets the SIM break stop/wait bit, SBSW, in the break
status register (BSR). If the COP disable bit, COPD, in the mask option
register is logic zero, then the computer operating properly module
(COP) is enabled and remains active in wait mode.
WAIT ADDR
IAB
WAIT ADDR + 1
PREVIOUS DATA
IDB
SAME
NEXT OPCODE
SAME
SAME
SAME
R/W
NOTE: Previous data can be operand data or the WAIT opcode, depending on the
last instruction.
Figure 7-15. Wait Mode Entry Timing
Figure 7-16 and Figure 7-17 show the timing for WAIT recovery.
IAB
$6E0B
$A6
IDB
$A6
$6E0C
$A6
$01
$00FF
$0B
$00FE
$00FD
$00FC
$6E
EXITSTOPWAIT
NOTE: EXITSTOPWAIT = RST pin OR CPU interrupt OR break interrupt
Figure 7-16. Wait Recovery from Interrupt or Break
32
Cycles
IAB
IDB
$6E0B
$A6
$A6
32
Cycles
RST VCTH
RSTVCTL
$A6
RST
2OSCOUT
Figure 7-17. Wait Recovery from Internal Reset
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
95
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.7.2 Stop Mode
In stop mode, the SIM counter is reset and the system clocks are
disabled. An interrupt request from a module can cause an exit from stop
mode. Stacking for interrupts begins after the selected stop recovery
time has elapsed. Reset or break also causes an exit from stop mode.
The SIM disables the oscillator signals (OSCOUT and 2OSCOUT) in
stop mode, stopping the CPU and peripherals. Stop recovery time is
selectable using the SSREC bit in the configuration register (CONFIG).
If SSREC is set, stop recovery is reduced from the normal delay of 4096
2OSCOUT cycles down to 32. This is ideal for applications using canned
oscillators that do not require long start-up times from stop mode.
NOTE:
External crystal applications should use the full stop recovery time by
clearing the SSREC bit.
A break interrupt during stop mode sets the SIM break stop/wait bit
(SBSW) in the break status register (BSR).
The SIM counter is held in reset from the execution of the STOP
instruction until the beginning of stop recovery. It is then used to time the
recovery period. Figure 7-18 shows stop mode entry timing.
NOTE:
To minimize stop current, all pins configured as inputs should be driven
to a logic 1 or logic 0.
CPUSTOP
IAB
IDB
STOP ADDR
STOP ADDR + 1
PREVIOUS DATA
SAME
NEXT OPCODE
SAME
SAME
SAME
R/W
NOTE: Previous data can be operand data or the STOP opcode, depending on the last
instruction.
Figure 7-18. Stop Mode Entry Timing
Technical Data
96
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
SIM Registers
STOP RECOVERY PERIOD
2OSCOUT
INT/BREAK
IAB
STOP + 2
STOP +1
STOP + 2
SP
SP – 1
SP – 2
SP – 3
Figure 7-19. Stop Mode Recovery from Interrupt or Break
7.8 SIM Registers
The SIM has three memory mapped registers. Table 7-4 shows the
mapping of these registers.
Table 7-4. SIM Registers
Address
Register
Access Mode
$FE00
BSR
User
$FE01
RSR
User
$FE03
BFCR
User
7.8.1 Break Status Register (BSR)
The break status register contains a flag to indicate that a break caused
an exit from stop or wait mode.
Address:
$FE00
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
R
R
R
R
R
R
Read:
1
Bit 0
SBSW
Write:
Note(1)
Reset:
0
R
= Reserved
R
1. Writing a logic zero clears SBSW.
Figure 7-20. Break Status Register (BSR)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
97
System Integration Module (SIM)
SBSW — SIM Break Stop/Wait
This status bit is useful in applications requiring a return to wait or stop
mode after exiting from a break interrupt. Clear SBSW by writing a
logic zero to it. Reset clears SBSW.
1 = Stop mode or wait mode was exited by break interrupt
0 = Stop mode or wait mode was not exited by break interrupt
SBSW can be read within the break state SWI routine. The user can
modify the return address on the stack by subtracting one from it. The
following code is an example of this. Writing zero to the SBSW bit clears
it.
; This code works if the H register has been pushed onto the stack in the break
; service routine software. This code should be executed at the end of the
; break service routine software.
HIBYTE
EQU
5
LOBYTE
EQU
6
;
If not SBSW, do RTI
BRCLR
SBSW,BSR, RETURN
; See if wait mode or stop mode was exited
; by break.
TST
LOBYTE,SP
; If RETURNLO is not zero,
BNE
DOLO
; then just decrement low byte.
DEC
HIBYTE,SP
; Else deal with high byte, too.
DOLO
DEC
LOBYTE,SP
; Point to WAIT/STOP opcode.
RETURN
PULH
RTI
; Restore H register.
7.8.2 Reset Status Register (RSR)
This register contains six flags that show the source of the last reset.
Clear the SIM reset status register by reading it. A power-on reset sets
the POR bit and clears all other bits in the register.
Technical Data
98
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
SIM Registers
Address:
Read:
$FE01
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
POR
PIN
COP
ILOP
ILAD
MODRST
LVI
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Write:
POR:
= Unimplemented
Figure 7-21. Reset Status Register (RSR)
POR — Power-On Reset Bit
1 = Last reset caused by POR circuit
0 = Read of SRSR
PIN — External Reset Bit
1 = Last reset caused by external reset pin (RST)
0 = POR or read of SRSR
COP — Computer Operating Properly Reset Bit
1 = Last reset caused by COP counter
0 = POR or read of SRSR
ILOP — Illegal Opcode Reset Bit
1 = Last reset caused by an illegal opcode
0 = POR or read of SRSR
ILAD — Illegal Address Reset Bit (opcode fetches only)
1 = Last reset caused by an opcode fetch from an illegal address
0 = POR or read of SRSR
MODRST — Monitor Mode Entry Module Reset bit
1 = Last reset caused by monitor mode entry when vector locations
$FFFE and $FFFF are $FF after POR while IRQ1 = VDD
0 = POR or read of SRSR
LVI — Low Voltage Inhibit Reset bit
1 = Last reset caused by LVI circuit
0 = POR or read of SRSR
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM)
Technical Data
99
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.8.3 Break Flag Control Register (BFCR)
The break control register contains a bit that enables software to clear
status bits while the MCU is in a break state.
Address:
$FE03
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
BCFE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Read:
Write:
Reset:
0
R
= Reserved
Figure 7-22. Break Flag Control Register (BFCR)
BCFE — Break Clear Flag Enable Bit
This read/write bit enables software to clear status bits by accessing
status registers while the MCU is in a break state. To clear status bits
during the break state, the BCFE bit must be set.
1 = Status bits clearable during break
0 = Status bits not clearable during break
Technical Data
100
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
System Integration Module (SIM)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 8. Oscillator (OSC)
8.1 Contents
8.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.3
X-tal Oscillator (MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E). . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.4
RC Oscillator (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E) . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.5
I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.1
Crystal Amplifier Input Pin (OSC1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.2
Crystal Amplifier Output Pin (OSC2/PTA6/RCCLK). . . . . . 104
8.5.3
Oscillator Enable Signal (SIMOSCEN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.4
X-tal Oscillator Clock (XTALCLK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5.5
RC Oscillator Clock (RCCLK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5.6
Oscillator Out 2 (2OSCOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5.7
Oscillator Out (OSCOUT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.6
Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
8.6.1
Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.6.2
Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.7
Oscillator During Break Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.2 Introduction
The oscillator module provides the reference clock for the MCU system
and bus. Two types of oscillator modules are available:
•
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — built-in oscillator module (X-tal)
that requires an external crystal or ceramic-resonator. This option
also allows an external clock that can be driven directly into OSC1.
•
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — built-in oscillator module (RC)
that requires an external RC connection only.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Oscillator (OSC)
101
Oscillator (OSC)
8.3 X-tal Oscillator (MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E)
The X-tal oscillator circuit is designed for use with an external crystal or
ceramic resonator to provide accurate clock source.
In its typical configuration, the X-tal oscillator is connected in a Pierce
oscillator configuration, as shown in Figure 8-1. This figure shows only
the logical representation of the internal components and may not
represent actual circuitry. The oscillator configuration uses five
components:
•
Crystal, X1
•
Fixed capacitor, C1
•
Tuning capacitor, C2 (can also be a fixed capacitor)
•
Feedback resistor, RB
•
Series resistor, RS (optional)
To SIM
From SIM
2OSCOUT
XTALCLK
To SIM
OSCOUT
÷2
SIMOSCEN
MCU
OSC1
RB
OSC2
R S*
*RS can be zero (shorted) when used with higher-frequency crystals.
Refer to manufacturer’s data.
X1
See Section 18. for component value requirements.
C1
C2
Figure 8-1. X-tal Oscillator External Connections
Technical Data
102
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Oscillator (OSC)
MOTOROLA
Oscillator (OSC)
RC Oscillator (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E)
The series resistor (RS) is included in the diagram to follow strict Pierce
oscillator guidelines and may not be required for all ranges of operation,
especially with high frequency crystals. Refer to the crystal
manufacturer’s data for more information.
8.4 RC Oscillator (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E)
The RC oscillator circuit is designed for use with external R and C to
provide a clock source with tolerance less than 10%.
In its typical configuration, the RC oscillator requires two external
components, one R and one C. Component values should have a
tolerance of 1% or less, to obtain a clock source with less than 10%
tolerance. The oscillator configuration uses two components:
•
CEXT
•
REXT
From SIM
To SIM
To SIM
2OSCOUT
SIMOSCEN
Ext-RC
Oscillator
EN
OSCOUT
RCCLK
÷2
0
1
PTA6
I/O
PTA6
PTA6EN
MCU
OSC1
VDD
REXT
PTA6/RCCLK (OSC2)
CEXT
See Section 18. for component value requirements.
Figure 8-2. RC Oscillator External Connections
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Oscillator (OSC)
103
Oscillator (OSC)
8.5 I/O Signals
The following paragraphs describe the oscillator I/O signals.
8.5.1 Crystal Amplifier Input Pin (OSC1)
OSC1 pin is an input to the crystal oscillator amplifier or the input to the
RC oscillator circuit.
8.5.2 Crystal Amplifier Output Pin (OSC2/PTA6/RCCLK)
For the X-tal oscillator device, OSC2 pin is the output of the crystal
oscillator inverting amplifier.
For the RC oscillator device, OSC2 pin can be configured as a general
purpose I/O pin PTA6, or the output of the internal RC oscillator clock,
RCCLK.
Device
Oscillator
OSC2 pin function
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
X-tal
Inverting OSC1
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
RC
Controlled by PTA6EN bit in PTAPUER ($0D)
PTA6EN = 0: RCCLK output
PTA6EN = 1: PTA6 I/O
8.5.3 Oscillator Enable Signal (SIMOSCEN)
The SIMOSCEN signal comes from the system integration module (SIM)
and enables/disables the X-tal oscillator circuit or the RC-oscillator.
8.5.4 X-tal Oscillator Clock (XTALCLK)
XTALCLK is the X-tal oscillator output signal. It runs at the full speed of
the crystal (fXCLK) and comes directly from the crystal oscillator circuit.
Figure 8-1 shows only the logical relation of XTALCLK to OSC1 and
OSC2 and may not represent the actual circuitry. The duty cycle of
XTALCLK is unknown and may depend on the crystal and other external
factors. Also, the frequency and amplitude of XTALCLK can be unstable
at start-up.
Technical Data
104
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Oscillator (OSC)
MOTOROLA
Oscillator (OSC)
Low Power Modes
8.5.5 RC Oscillator Clock (RCCLK)
RCCLK is the RC oscillator output signal. Its frequency is directly
proportional to the time constant of the external R and C. Figure 8-2
shows only the logical relation of RCCLK to OSC1 and may not
represent the actual circuitry.
8.5.6 Oscillator Out 2 (2OSCOUT)
2OSCOUT is same as the input clock (XTALCLK or RCCLK). This signal
is driven to the SIM module and is used to determine the COP cycles.
8.5.7 Oscillator Out (OSCOUT)
The frequency of this signal is equal to half of the 2OSCOUT, this signal
is driven to the SIM for generation of the bus clocks used by the CPU
and other modules on the MCU. OSCOUT will be divided again in the
SIM and results in the internal bus frequency being one fourth of the
XTALCLK or RCCLK frequency.
8.6 Low Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low-power
consumption standby modes.
8.6.1 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction has no effect on the oscillator logic. OSCOUT and
2OSCOUT continues to drive to the SIM module.
8.6.2 Stop Mode
The STOP instruction disables the XTALCLK or the RCCLK output,
hence OSCOUT and 2OSCOUT.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Oscillator (OSC)
105
Oscillator (OSC)
8.7 Oscillator During Break Mode
The oscillator continues to drive OSCOUT and 2OSCOUT when the
device enters the break state.
Technical Data
106
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Oscillator (OSC)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 9. Monitor ROM (MON)
9.1 Contents
9.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.4
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.4.1
Entering Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.4.2
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9.4.3
Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
9.4.4
Echoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
9.4.5
Break Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
9.4.6
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9.5
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9.2 Introduction
This section describes the monitor ROM (MON) and the monitor mode
entry methods. The monitor ROM allows complete testing of the MCU
through a single-wire interface with a host computer. This mode is also
used for programming and erasing of FLASH memory in the MCU.
Monitor mode entry can be achieved without use of the higher test
voltage, VDD + VHI, as long as vector addresses $FFFE and $FFFF are
blank, thus reducing the hardware requirements for in-circuit
programming.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Monitor ROM (MON)
107
Monitor ROM (MON)
9.3 Features
Features of the monitor ROM include the following:
•
Normal user-mode pin functionality
•
One pin dedicated to serial communication between monitor ROM
and host computer
•
Standard mark/space non-return-to-zero (NRZ) communication
with host computer
•
Execution of code in RAM or FLASH
•
FLASH memory security feature1
•
FLASH memory programming interface
•
960 bytes monitor ROM code size
•
Monitor mode entry without high voltage, VDD + VHI, if reset vector
is blank ($FFFE and $FFFF contain $FF)
•
Standard monitor mode entry if high voltage, VDD + VHI, is applied
to IRQ1
9.4 Functional Description
The monitor ROM receives and executes commands from a host
computer. Figure 9-1 shows a example circuit used to enter monitor
mode and communicate with a host computer via a standard RS-232
interface.
Simple monitor commands can access any memory address. In monitor
mode, the MCU can execute host-computer code in RAM while most
MCU pins retain normal operating mode functions. All communication
between the host computer and the MCU is through the PTB0 pin. A
level-shifting and multiplexing interface is required between PTB0 and
the host computer. PTB0 is used in a wired-OR configuration and
requires a pull-up resistor.
1. No security feature is absolutely secure. However, Motorola’s strategy is to make reading or
copying the FLASH difficult for unauthorized users.
Technical Data
108
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Monitor ROM (MON)
MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON)
Functional Description
RC CIRCUIT
RST
VDD
FOR MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
SW1 MUST BE AT POSITION B
0.1 µF
See Figure 18-1 for component
values vs. frequency.
H(R)C908JL3E
H(R)C908JK3E
H(R)C908JK1E
OSC1
VDD
OSC2
VDD
0.1 µF
VSS
EXT OSC
VDD
FOR MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
SW1 AT POSITION A OR B
(50% DUTY)
OSC1
OSC2
FOR MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
SW1 MUST BE AT POSITION A
XTAL CIRCUIT
MAX232
1
1 µF
+
3
4
1 µF
C1+
9.8304MHz
20 pF
OSC2
VDD
VCC
C1–
GND
C2+
V+
20 pF
16
+
1 µF
15
+
1 µF
A
VDD + VHI
2
VDD
+
5 C2–
V–
7
10
3
8
9
B
VDD
10 k
10 k
74HC125
5
6
DB9
2
(SEE NOTE 1)
IRQ
8.5 V
1 µF
SW1
1k
6
+
5
OSC1
10M
FOR MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
SW1 AT POSITION A OR B
2
74HC125
3
PTB0
4
VDD
VDD
1
10 k
10 k
C
NOTES:
1. Monitor mode entry method:
SW1: Position A — High voltage entry (VTST)
Clock source must be EXT OSC or XTAL CIRCUIT.
Bus clock depends on SW2.
SW1: Position B — Reset vector must be blank ($FFFE = $FFFF = $FF)
Bus clock = OSC1 ÷ 4.
2. Affects high voltage entry to monitor mode only (SW1 at position A):
SW2: Position C — Bus clock = OSC1 ÷ 4
SW2: Position D — Bus clock = OSC1 ÷ 2
5. See Table 18-4 for VDD + VHI voltage level requirements.
PTB1
SW2
PTB3
(SEE NOTE 2)
D
10 k
PTB2
10 k
Figure 9-1. Monitor Mode Circuit
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Monitor ROM (MON)
109
Monitor ROM (MON)
9.4.1 Entering Monitor Mode
Table 9-1 shows the pin conditions for entering monitor mode. As
specified in the table, monitor mode may be entered after a POR and will
allow communication at 9600 baud provided one of the following sets of
conditions is met:
1. If IRQ1 = VDD + VHI:
– Clock on OSC1 is 4.9125MHz (EXT OSC or XTAL)
– PTB3 = low
2. If IRQ1 = VDD + VHI:
– Clock on OSC1 is 9.8304MHz (EXT OSC or XTAL)
– PTB3 = high
3. If $FFFE & $FFFF is blank (contains $FF):
– Clock on OSC1 is 9.8304MHz (EXT OSC or XTAL or RC)
– IRQ1 = VDD
IRQ1
$FFFE
and
$FFFF
PTB3(1)
PTB2
PTB1
PTB0
Table 9-1. Monitor Mode Entry Requirements and Options
OSC1 Frequency
VDD + VHI(2)
X
0
0
1
1
4.9152MHz
2.4576MHz
(OSC1 ÷ 2)
VDD + VHI
X
1
0
1
1
9.8304MHz
2.4576MHz
(OSC1 ÷ 4)
VDD
BLANK
(contain
$FF)
X
X
X
1
9.8304MHz
2.4576MHz
(OSC1 ÷ 4)
VDD
NOT
BLANK
X
X
X
X
At desired
frequency
OSC1 ÷ 4
Bus
Frequency
Comments
High-voltage entry to
monitor mode.(3)
9600 baud communication
on PTB0. COP disabled.
Low-voltage entry to
monitor mode.(4)
9600 baud communication
on PTB0. COP disabled.
Enters User mode.
Notes:
1. PTB3 = 0: Bypasses the divide-by-two prescaler to SIM when using VDD + VHI for monitor mode entry.
The OSC1 clock must be 50% duty cycle for this condition.
2. See Table 18-4 for VDD + VHI voltage level requirements.
3. For IRQ1 = VDD + VHI:
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — clock must be EXT OSC.
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — clock can be EXT OSC or XTAL.
4. For IRQ1 = VDD:
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — clock must be RC OSC.
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — clock can be EXT OSC or XTAL.
Technical Data
110
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Monitor ROM (MON)
MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON)
Functional Description
If VDD +VHI is applied to IRQ1 and PTB3 is low upon monitor mode entry
(Table 9-1 condition set 1), the bus frequency is a divide-by-two of the
clock input to OSC1. If PTB3 is high with VDD +VHI applied to IRQ1 upon
monitor mode entry (Table 9-1 condition set 2), the bus frequency is a
divide-by-four of the clock input to OSC1. Holding the PTB3 pin low
when entering monitor mode causes a bypass of a divide-by-two stage
at the oscillator only if VDD +VHI is applied to IRQ1. In this event, the
OSCOUT frequency is equal to the 2OSCOUT frequency, and OSC1
input directly generates internal bus clocks. In this case, the OSC1
signal must have a 50% duty cycle at maximum bus frequency.
Entering monitor mode with VDD + VHI on IRQ1, the COP is disabled as
long as VDD + VHI is applied to either the IRQ1 or the RST. (See Section
7. System Integration Module (SIM) for more information on modes of
operation.)
If entering monitor mode without high voltage on IRQ1 and reset vector
being blank ($FFFE and $FFFF) (Table 9-1 condition set 3, where
applied voltage is VDD), then all port B pin requirements and conditions,
including the PTB3 frequency divisor selection, are not in effect. This is
to reduce circuit requirements when performing in-circuit programming.
Entering monitor mode with the reset vector being blank, the COP is
always disabled regardless of the state of IRQ1 or the RST.
Figure 9-2. shows a simplified diagram of the monitor mode entry when
the reset vector is blank and IRQ1 = VDD. An OSC1 frequency of
9.8304MHz is required for a baud rate of 9600.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Monitor ROM (MON)
111
Monitor ROM (MON)
POR RESET
IS VECTOR
BLANK?
NO
NORMAL USER
MODE
YES
MONITOR MODE
EXECUTE
MONITOR
CODE
POR
TRIGGERED?
NO
YES
Figure 9-2. Low-Voltage Monitor Mode Entry Flowchart
Enter monitor mode with the pin configuration shown above by pulling
RST low and then high. The rising edge of RST latches monitor mode.
Once monitor mode is latched, the values on the specified pins can
change.
Once out of reset, the MCU waits for the host to send eight security
bytes. (See 9.5 Security.) After the security bytes, the MCU sends a
break signal (10 consecutive logic zeros) to the host, indicating that it is
ready to receive a command. The break signal also provides a timing
reference to allow the host to determine the necessary baud rate.
In monitor mode, the MCU uses different vectors for reset, SWI, and
break interrupt. The alternate vectors are in the $FE page instead of the
$FF page and allow code execution from the internal monitor firmware
instead of user code.
Technical Data
112
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Monitor ROM (MON)
MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON)
Functional Description
Table 9-2 is a summary of the vector differences between user mode
and monitor mode.
Table 9-2. Monitor Mode Vector Differences
Functions
COP
Reset
Vector
High
Reset
Vector
Low
Break
Vector
High
Break
Vector
Low
SWI
Vector
High
SWI
Vector
Low
User
Enabled
$FFFE
$FFFF
$FFFC
$FFFD
$FFFC
$FFFD
Monitor
Disabled(1)
$FEFE
$FEFF
$FEFC
$FEFD
$FEFC
$FEFD
Modes
Notes:
1. If the high voltage (VDD + VHI) is removed from the IRQ1 pin or the RST pin, the SIM
asserts its COP enable output. The COP is a mask option enabled or disabled by the
COPD bit in the configuration register.
When the host computer has completed downloading code into the MCU
RAM, the host then sends a RUN command, which executes an RTI,
which sends control to the address on the stack pointer.
9.4.2 Baud Rate
The communication baud rate is dependant on oscillator frequency. The
state of PTB3 also affects baud rate if entry to monitor mode is by IRQ1 =
VDD + VHI. When PTB3 is high, the divide by ratio is 1024. If the PTB3
pin is at logic zero upon entry into monitor mode, the divide by ratio is
512.
Table 9-3. Monitor Baud Rate Selection
Monitor Mode
Entry By:
IRQ1 = VDD + VHI
Blank reset vector,
IRQ1 = VDD
Input Clock
Frequency
PTB3
Baud Rate
4.9152 MHz
0
9600 bps
9.8304 MHz
1
9600 bps
4.9152 MHz
1
4800 bps
9.8304 MHz
X
9600 bps
4.9152 MHz
X
4800 bps
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Monitor ROM (MON)
113
Monitor ROM (MON)
9.4.3 Data Format
Communication with the monitor ROM is in standard non-return-to-zero
(NRZ) mark/space data format. (See Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4.)
START
BIT
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
STOP
BIT
BIT 7
NEXT
START
BIT
Figure 9-3. Monitor Data Format
$A5
START
BIT
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BREAK
START
BIT
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
STOP
BIT
STOP
BIT
NEXT
START
BIT
NEXT
START
BIT
Figure 9-4. Sample Monitor Waveforms
The data transmit and receive rate can be anywhere from 4800 baud to
28.8k-baud. Transmit and receive baud rates must be identical.
9.4.4 Echoing
As shown in Figure 9-5, the monitor ROM immediately echoes each
received byte back to the PTB0 pin for error checking.
SENT TO
MONITOR
READ
READ
ADDR. HIGH ADDR. HIGH
ADDR. LOW
ECHO
ADDR. LOW
DATA
RESULT
Figure 9-5. Read Transaction
Any result of a command appears after the echo of the last byte of the
command.
Technical Data
114
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Monitor ROM (MON)
MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON)
Functional Description
9.4.5 Break Signal
A start bit followed by nine low bits is a break signal. (See Figure 9-6.)
When the monitor receives a break signal, it drives the PTB0 pin high for
the duration of two bits before echoing the break signal.
MISSING STOP BIT
TWO-STOP-BIT DELAY BEFORE ZERO ECHO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 9-6. Break Transaction
9.4.6 Commands
The monitor ROM uses the following commands:
•
READ (read memory)
•
WRITE (write memory)
•
IREAD (indexed read)
•
IWRITE (indexed write)
•
READSP (read stack pointer)
•
RUN (run user program)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Monitor ROM (MON)
115
Monitor ROM (MON)
Table 9-4. READ (Read Memory) Command
Description
Read byte from memory
Operand
Specifies 2-byte address in high byte:low byte order
Data Returned
Returns contents of specified address
Opcode
$4A
Command Sequence
SENT TO
MONITOR
READ
READ
ADDR. HIGH
ADDR. HIGH
ADDR. LOW
ADDR. LOW
ECHO
DATA
RESULT
Table 9-5. WRITE (Write Memory) Command
Description
Write byte to memory
Operand
Specifies 2-byte address in high byte:low byte order; low byte followed by data byte
Data Returned
None
Opcode
$49
Command Sequence
SENT TO
MONITOR
WRITE
WRITE
ADDR. HIGH
ADDR. HIGH
ADDR. LOW
ADDR. LOW
DATA
DATA
ECHO
Technical Data
116
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Monitor ROM (MON)
MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON)
Functional Description
Table 9-6. IREAD (Indexed Read) Command
Description
Read next 2 bytes in memory from last address accessed
Operand
Specifies 2-byte address in high byte:low byte order
Data Returned
Returns contents of next two addresses
Opcode
$1A
Command Sequence
SENT TO
MONITOR
IREAD
IREAD
DATA
DATA
RESULT
ECHO
Table 9-7. IWRITE (Indexed Write) Command
Description
Write to last address accessed + 1
Operand
Specifies single data byte
Data Returned
None
Opcode
$19
Command Sequence
SENT TO
MONITOR
IWRITE
IWRITE
DATA
DATA
ECHO
NOTE:
A sequence of IREAD or IWRITE commands can sequentially access a
block of memory over the full 64-Kbyte memory map.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Monitor ROM (MON)
117
Monitor ROM (MON)
Table 9-8. READSP (Read Stack Pointer) Command
Description
Reads stack pointer
Operand
None
Data Returned
Returns stack pointer in high byte:low byte order
Opcode
$0C
Command Sequence
SENT TO
MONITOR
READSP
READSP
SP HIGH
SP LOW
RESULT
ECHO
Table 9-9. RUN (Run User Program) Command
Description
Executes RTI instruction
Operand
None
Data Returned
None
Opcode
$28
Command Sequence
SENT TO
MONITOR
RUN
RUN
ECHO
Technical Data
118
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Monitor ROM (MON)
MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON)
Security
9.5 Security
A security feature discourages unauthorized reading of FLASH locations
while in monitor mode. The host can bypass the security feature at
monitor mode entry by sending eight security bytes that match the bytes
at locations $FFF6–$FFFD. Locations $FFF6–$FFFD contain userdefined data.
NOTE:
Do not leave locations $FFF6–$FFFD blank. For security reasons,
program locations $FFF6–$FFFD even if they are not used for vectors.
During monitor mode entry, the MCU waits after the power-on reset for
the host to send the eight security bytes on pin PTB0. If the received
bytes match those at locations $FFF6–$FFFD, the host bypasses the
security feature and can read all FLASH locations and execute code
from FLASH. Security remains bypassed until a power-on reset occurs.
If the reset was not a power-on reset, security remains bypassed and
security code entry is not required. (See Figure 9-7.)
VDD
4096 + 32 OSCXCLK CYCLES
RST
COMMAND
BYTE 8
BYTE 2
BYTE 1
24 BUS CYCLES
FROM HOST
PTB0
NOTES:
1 = Echo delay, 2 bit times
2 = Data return delay, 2 bit times
4 = Wait 1 bit time before sending next byte.
4
1
COMMAND ECHO
2
BREAK
1
BYTE 8 ECHO
1
BYTE 2 ECHO
FROM MCU
4
BYTE 1 ECHO
1
Figure 9-7. Monitor Mode Entry Timing
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Monitor ROM (MON)
119
Monitor ROM (MON)
Upon power-on reset, if the received bytes of the security code do not
match the data at locations $FFF6–$FFFD, the host fails to bypass the
security feature. The MCU remains in monitor mode, but reading a
FLASH location returns an invalid value and trying to execute code from
FLASH causes an illegal address reset. After receiving the eight security
bytes from the host, the MCU transmits a break character, signifying that
it is ready to receive a command.
NOTE:
The MCU does not transmit a break character until after the host sends
the eight security bytes.
To determine whether the security code entered is correct, check to see
if bit 6 of RAM address $40 is set. If it is, then the correct security code
has been entered and FLASH can be accessed.
If the security sequence fails, the device should be reset by a power-on
reset and brought up in monitor mode to attempt another entry. After
failing the security sequence, the FLASH module can also be mass
erased by executing an erase routine that was downloaded into internal
RAM. The mass erase operation clears the security code locations so
that all eight security bytes become $FF (blank).
Technical Data
120
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Monitor ROM (MON)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 10. Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.1 Contents
10.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.4
Pin Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.5 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10.5.1 TIM Counter Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.5.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.5.3 Output Compare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.5.3.1
Unbuffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10.5.3.2
Buffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.5.4 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.5.4.1
Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10.5.4.2
Buffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.5.4.3
PWM Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.6
Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.7 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
10.7.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.7.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.8
TIM During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.9
I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.10 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.10.1 TIM Status and Control Register (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
10.10.2 TIM Counter Registers (TCNTH:TCNTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.10.3 TIM Counter Modulo Registers (TMODH:TMODL) . . . . . . 137
10.10.4 TIM Channel Status and Control Registers (TSC0:TSC1) .138
10.10.5 TIM Channel Registers (TCH0H/L:TCH1H/L) . . . . . . . . . . 142
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
121
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.2 Introduction
This section describes the timer interface module (TIM2, Version B). The
TIM is a two-channel timer that provides a timing reference with input
capture, output compare, and pulse-width-modulation functions.
Figure 10-1 is a block diagram of the TIM.
10.3 Features
Features of the TIM include the following:
•
Two input capture/output compare channels
– Rising-edge, falling-edge, or any-edge input capture trigger
– Set, clear, or toggle output compare action
•
Buffered and unbuffered pulse width modulation (PWM) signal
generation
•
Programmable TIM clock input with 7-frequency internal bus clock
prescaler selection
•
Free-running or modulo up-count operation
•
Toggle any channel pin on overflow
•
TIM counter stop and reset bits
10.4 Pin Name Conventions
The TIM share two I/O pins with two port D I/O pins. The full name of the
TIM I/O pins are listed in Table 10-1. The generic pin name appear in the
text that follows.
Table 10-1. Pin Name Conventions
Technical Data
122
TIM Generic Pin Names:
TCH0
TCH1
Full TIM Pin Names:
PTD4/TCH0
PTD5/TCH1
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Functional Description
10.5 Functional Description
Figure 10-1 shows the structure of the TIM. The central component of
the TIM is the 16-bit TIM counter that can operate as a free-running
counter or a modulo up-counter. The TIM counter provides the timing
reference for the input capture and output compare functions. The TIM
counter modulo registers, TMODH:TMODL, control the modulo value of
the TIM counter. Software can read the TIM counter value at any time
without affecting the counting sequence.
The two TIM channels are programmable independently as input
capture or output compare channels.
PRESCALER SELECT
INTERNAL
BUS CLOCK
PRESCALER
TSTOP
PS2
TRST
PS1
PS0
16-BIT COUNTER
TOF
TOIE
INTERRUPT
LOGIC
16-BIT COMPARATOR
TMODH:TMODL
TOV0
CHANNEL 0
ELS0B
ELS0A
CH0MAX
16-BIT COMPARATOR
TCH0H:TCH0L
PORT
LOGIC
TCH0
CH0F
INTERRUPT
LOGIC
16-BIT LATCH
MS0A
CH0IE
MS0B
INTERNAL BUS
TOV1
CHANNEL 1
ELS1B
ELS1A
CH1MAX
PORT
LOGIC
TCH1
16-BIT COMPARATOR
TCH1H:TCH1L
CH1F
INTERRUPT
LOGIC
16-BIT LATCH
MS1A
CH1IE
Figure 10-1. TIM Block Diagram
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
123
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Addr.
$0020
$0021
$0022
Register Name
TIM Status and Control
Register
(TSC)
TIM Counter Register High
(TCNTH)
TIM Counter Register Low
(TCNTL)
Bit 7
Read:
$0023
TIM Counter Modulo
Register Low
(TMODL)
$0024
$0025
TIM Channel 0 Status and
Control Register
(TSC0)
TIM Channel 0
Register High
(TCH0H)
$0026
TIM Channel 0
Register Low
(TCH0L)
$0027
$0028
TIM Channel 1 Status and
Control Register
(TSC1)
5
TOIE
TSTOP
TOF
4
3
0
0
2
1
Bit 0
PS2
PS1
PS0
Write:
0
Reset:
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
TRST
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read:
CH0F
CH0IE
MS0B
MS0A
ELS0B
ELS0A
TOV0
CH0MAX
Write:
0
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Write:
Write:
Reset:
TIM Counter Modulo
Register High
(TMODH)
6
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Read:
Write:
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Indeterminate after reset
Read:
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Write:
Reset:
Read:
Indeterminate after reset
CH1F
0
CH1IE
Write:
0
Reset:
0
0
MS1A
ELS1B
ELS1A
TOV1
CH1MAX
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 10-2. TIM I/O Register Summary
Technical Data
124
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Functional Description
$0029
$002A
TIM Channel 1
Register High
(TCH1H)
TIM Channel 1
Register Low
(TCH1L)
Read:
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Write:
Reset:
Indeterminate after reset
Read:
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Write:
Reset:
Indeterminate after reset
= Unimplemented
Figure 10-2. TIM I/O Register Summary
10.5.1 TIM Counter Prescaler
The TIM clock source is one of the seven prescaler outputs. The
prescaler generates seven clock rates from the internal bus clock. The
prescaler select bits, PS[2:0], in the TIM status and control register
(TSC) select the TIM clock source.
10.5.2 Input Capture
With the input capture function, the TIM can capture the time at which an
external event occurs. When an active edge occurs on the pin of an input
capture channel, the TIM latches the contents of the TIM counter into the
TIM channel registers, TCHxH:TCHxL. The polarity of the active edge is
programmable. Input captures can generate TIM CPU interrupt
requests.
10.5.3 Output Compare
With the output compare function, the TIM can generate a periodic pulse
with a programmable polarity, duration, and frequency. When the
counter reaches the value in the registers of an output compare channel,
the TIM can set, clear, or toggle the channel pin. Output compares can
generate TIM CPU interrupt requests.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
125
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.5.3.1 Unbuffered Output Compare
Any output compare channel can generate unbuffered output compare
pulses as described in 10.5.3 Output Compare. The pulses are
unbuffered because changing the output compare value requires writing
the new value over the old value currently in the TIM channel registers.
An unsynchronized write to the TIM channel registers to change an
output compare value could cause incorrect operation for up to two
counter overflow periods. For example, writing a new value before the
counter reaches the old value but after the counter reaches the new
value prevents any compare during that counter overflow period. Also,
using a TIM overflow interrupt routine to write a new, smaller output
compare value may cause the compare to be missed. The TIM may pass
the new value before it is written.
Use the following methods to synchronize unbuffered changes in the
output compare value on channel x:
Technical Data
126
•
When changing to a smaller value, enable channel x output
compare interrupts and write the new value in the output compare
interrupt routine. The output compare interrupt occurs at the end
of the current output compare pulse. The interrupt routine has until
the end of the counter overflow period to write the new value.
•
When changing to a larger output compare value, enable TIM
overflow interrupts and write the new value in the TIM overflow
interrupt routine. The TIM overflow interrupt occurs at the end of
the current counter overflow period. Writing a larger value in an
output compare interrupt routine (at the end of the current pulse)
could cause two output compares to occur in the same counter
overflow period.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Functional Description
10.5.3.2 Buffered Output Compare
Channels 0 and 1 can be linked to form a buffered output compare
channel whose output appears on the TCH0 pin. The TIM channel
registers of the linked pair alternately control the output.
Setting the MS0B bit in TIM channel 0 status and control register (TSC0)
links channel 0 and channel 1. The output compare value in the TIM
channel 0 registers initially controls the output on the TCH0 pin. Writing
to the TIM channel 1 registers enables the TIM channel 1 registers to
synchronously control the output after the TIM overflows. At each
subsequent overflow, the TIM channel registers (0 or 1) that control the
output are the ones written to last. TSC0 controls and monitors the
buffered output compare function, and TIM channel 1 status and control
register (TSC1) is unused. While the MS0B bit is set, the channel 1 pin,
TCH1, is available as a general-purpose I/O pin.
NOTE:
In buffered output compare operation, do not write new output compare
values to the currently active channel registers. User software should
track the currently active channel to prevent writing a new value to the
active channel. Writing to the active channel registers is the same as
generating unbuffered output compares.
10.5.4 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
By using the toggle-on-overflow feature with an output compare channel,
the TIM can generate a PWM signal. The value in the TIM counter
modulo registers determines the period of the PWM signal. The channel
pin toggles when the counter reaches the value in the TIM counter
modulo registers. The time between overflows is the period of the PWM
signal.
As Figure 10-3 shows, the output compare value in the TIM channel
registers determines the pulse width of the PWM signal. The time
between overflow and output compare is the pulse width. Program the
TIM to clear the channel pin on output compare if the state of the PWM
pulse is logic one. Program the TIM to set the pin if the state of the PWM
pulse is logic zero.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
127
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
PERIOD
PULSE
WIDTH
TCHx
OUTPUT
COMPARE
OUTPUT
COMPARE
OUTPUT
COMPARE
Figure 10-3. PWM Period and Pulse Width
The value in the TIM counter modulo registers and the selected
prescaler output determines the frequency of the PWM output. The
frequency of an 8-bit PWM signal is variable in 256 increments. Writing
$00FF (255) to the TIM counter modulo registers produces a PWM
period of 256 times the internal bus clock period if the prescaler select
value is 000 (see 10.10.1 TIM Status and Control Register (TSC)).
The value in the TIM channel registers determines the pulse width of the
PWM output. The pulse width of an 8-bit PWM signal is variable in 256
increments. Writing $0080 (128) to the TIM channel registers produces
a duty cycle of 128/256 or 50%.
10.5.4.1 Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation
Any output compare channel can generate unbuffered PWM pulses as
described in 10.5.4 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM). The pulses are
unbuffered because changing the pulse width requires writing the new
pulse width value over the old value currently in the TIM channel
registers.
An unsynchronized write to the TIM channel registers to change a pulse
width value could cause incorrect operation for up to two PWM periods.
For example, writing a new value before the counter reaches the old
value but after the counter reaches the new value prevents any compare
during that PWM period. Also, using a TIM overflow interrupt routine to
write a new, smaller pulse width value may cause the compare to be
missed. The TIM may pass the new value before it is written.
Technical Data
128
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Functional Description
Use the following methods to synchronize unbuffered changes in the
PWM pulse width on channel x:
NOTE:
•
When changing to a shorter pulse width, enable channel x output
compare interrupts and write the new value in the output compare
interrupt routine. The output compare interrupt occurs at the end
of the current pulse. The interrupt routine has until the end of the
PWM period to write the new value.
•
When changing to a longer pulse width, enable TIM overflow
interrupts and write the new value in the TIM overflow interrupt
routine. The TIM overflow interrupt occurs at the end of the current
PWM period. Writing a larger value in an output compare interrupt
routine (at the end of the current pulse) could cause two output
compares to occur in the same PWM period.
In PWM signal generation, do not program the PWM channel to toggle
on output compare. Toggling on output compare prevents reliable 0%
duty cycle generation and removes the ability of the channel to selfcorrect in the event of software error or noise. Toggling on output
compare also can cause incorrect PWM signal generation when
changing the PWM pulse width to a new, much larger value.
10.5.4.2 Buffered PWM Signal Generation
Channels 0 and 1 can be linked to form a buffered PWM channel whose
output appears on the TCH0 pin. The TIM channel registers of the linked
pair alternately control the pulse width of the output.
Setting the MS0B bit in TIM channel 0 status and control register (TSC0)
links channel 0 and channel 1. The TIM channel 0 registers initially
control the pulse width on the TCH0 pin. Writing to the TIM channel 1
registers enables the TIM channel 1 registers to synchronously control
the pulse width at the beginning of the next PWM period. At each
subsequent overflow, the TIM channel registers (0 or 1) that control the
pulse width are the ones written to last. TSC0 controls and monitors the
buffered PWM function, and TIM channel 1 status and control register
(TSC1) is unused. While the MS0B bit is set, the channel 1 pin, TCH1,
is available as a general-purpose I/O pin.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
129
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
NOTE:
In buffered PWM signal generation, do not write new pulse width values
to the currently active channel registers. User software should track the
currently active channel to prevent writing a new value to the active
channel. Writing to the active channel registers is the same as
generating unbuffered PWM signals.
10.5.4.3 PWM Initialization
To ensure correct operation when generating unbuffered or buffered
PWM signals, use the following initialization procedure:
1. In the TIM status and control register (TSC):
a. Stop the TIM counter by setting the TIM stop bit, TSTOP.
b. Reset the TIM counter and prescaler by setting the TIM reset
bit, TRST.
2. In the TIM counter modulo registers (TMODH:TMODL), write the
value for the required PWM period.
3. In the TIM channel x registers (TCHxH:TCHxL), write the value for
the required pulse width.
4. In TIM channel x status and control register (TSCx):
a. Write 0:1 (for unbuffered output compare or PWM signals) or
1:0 (for buffered output compare or PWM signals) to the mode
select bits, MSxB:MSxA. (See Table 10-3.)
b. Write 1 to the toggle-on-overflow bit, TOVx.
c.
NOTE:
Write 1:0 (to clear output on compare) or 1:1 (to set output on
compare) to the edge/level select bits, ELSxB:ELSxA. The
output action on compare must force the output to the
complement of the pulse width level. (See Table 10-3.)
In PWM signal generation, do not program the PWM channel to toggle
on output compare. Toggling on output compare prevents reliable 0%
duty cycle generation and removes the ability of the channel to selfcorrect in the event of software error or noise. Toggling on output
compare can also cause incorrect PWM signal generation when
changing the PWM pulse width to a new, much larger value.
5. In the TIM status control register (TSC), clear the TIM stop bit,
TSTOP.
Technical Data
130
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Interrupts
Setting MS0B links channels 0 and 1 and configures them for buffered
PWM operation. The TIM channel 0 registers (TCH0H:TCH0L) initially
control the buffered PWM output. TIM status control register 0 (TSC0)
controls and monitors the PWM signal from the linked channels. MS0B
takes priority over MS0A.
Clearing the toggle-on-overflow bit, TOVx, inhibits output toggles on TIM
overflows. Subsequent output compares try to force the output to a state
it is already in and have no effect. The result is a 0% duty cycle output.
Setting the channel x maximum duty cycle bit (CHxMAX) and setting the
TOVx bit generates a 100% duty cycle output. (See 10.10.4 TIM
Channel Status and Control Registers (TSC0:TSC1).)
10.6 Interrupts
The following TIM sources can generate interrupt requests:
•
TIM overflow flag (TOF) — The TOF bit is set when the TIM
counter reaches the modulo value programmed in the TIM counter
modulo registers. The TIM overflow interrupt enable bit, TOIE,
enables TIM overflow CPU interrupt requests. TOF and TOIE are
in the TIM status and control register.
•
TIM channel flags (CH1F:CH0F) — The CHxF bit is set when an
input capture or output compare occurs on channel x. Channel x
TIM CPU interrupt requests are controlled by the channel x
interrupt enable bit, CHxIE. Channel x TIM CPU interrupt requests
are enabled when CHxIE=1. CHxF and CHxIE are in the TIM
channel x status and control register.
10.7 Low-Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low powerconsumption standby modes.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
131
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.7.1 Wait Mode
The TIM remains active after the execution of a WAIT instruction. In wait
mode, the TIM registers are not accessible by the CPU. Any enabled
CPU interrupt request from the TIM can bring the MCU out of wait mode.
If TIM functions are not required during wait mode, reduce power
consumption by stopping the TIM before executing the WAIT instruction.
10.7.2 Stop Mode
The TIM is inactive after the execution of a STOP instruction. The STOP
instruction does not affect register conditions or the state of the TIM
counter. TIM operation resumes when the MCU exits stop mode after an
external interrupt.
10.8 TIM During Break Interrupts
A break interrupt stops the TIM counter.
The system integration module (SIM) controls whether status bits in
other modules can be cleared during the break state. The BCFE bit in
the break flag control register (BFCR) enables software to clear status
bits during the break state. (See 7.8.3 Break Flag Control Register
(BFCR).)
To allow software to clear status bits during a break interrupt, write a
logic one to the BCFE bit. If a status bit is cleared during the break state,
it remains cleared when the MCU exits the break state.
To protect status bits during the break state, write a logic zero to the
BCFE bit. With BCFE at logic zero (its default state), software can read
and write I/O registers during the break state without affecting status
bits. Some status bits have a two-step read/write clearing procedure. If
software does the first step on such a bit before the break, the bit cannot
change during the break state as long as BCFE is at logic zero. After the
break, doing the second step clears the status bit.
Technical Data
132
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
I/O Signals
10.9 I/O Signals
Port D shares two of its pins with the TIM. The two TIM channel I/O pins
are PTD4/TCH0 and PTD5/TCH1.
Each channel I/O pin is programmable independently as an input
capture pin or an output compare pin. PTD4/TCH0 can be configured as
a buffered output compare or buffered PWM pin.
10.10 I/O Registers
The following I/O registers control and monitor operation of the TIM:
•
TIM status and control register (TSC)
•
TIM counter registers (TCNTH:TCNTL)
•
TIM counter modulo registers (TMODH:TMODL)
•
TIM channel status and control registers (TSC0 and TSC1)
•
TIM channel registers (TCH0H:TCH0L and TCH1H:TCH1L)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
133
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.10.1 TIM Status and Control Register (TSC)
The TIM status and control register does the following:
•
Enables TIM overflow interrupts
•
Flags TIM overflows
•
Stops the TIM counter
•
Resets the TIM counter
•
Prescales the TIM counter clock
Address:
$0020
Bit 7
Read:
6
5
TOIE
TSTOP
TOF
Write:
0
Reset:
0
4
3
0
0
2
1
Bit 0
PS2
PS1
PS0
0
0
0
TRST
0
1
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 10-4. TIM Status and Control Register (TSC)
TOF — TIM Overflow Flag Bit
This read/write flag is set when the TIM counter reaches the modulo
value programmed in the TIM counter modulo registers. Clear TOF by
reading the TIM status and control register when TOF is set and then
writing a logic zero to TOF. If another TIM overflow occurs before the
clearing sequence is complete, then writing logic zero to TOF has no
effect. Therefore, a TOF interrupt request cannot be lost due to
inadvertent clearing of TOF. Reset clears the TOF bit. Writing a logic
one to TOF has no effect.
1 = TIM counter has reached modulo value
0 = TIM counter has not reached modulo value
TOIE — TIM Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit
This read/write bit enables TIM overflow interrupts when the TOF bit
becomes set. Reset clears the TOIE bit.
1 = TIM overflow interrupts enabled
0 = TIM overflow interrupts disabled
Technical Data
134
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
I/O Registers
TSTOP — TIM Stop Bit
This read/write bit stops the TIM counter. Counting resumes when
TSTOP is cleared. Reset sets the TSTOP bit, stopping the TIM
counter until software clears the TSTOP bit.
1 = TIM counter stopped
0 = TIM counter active
NOTE:
Do not set the TSTOP bit before entering wait mode if the TIM is required
to exit wait mode.
TRST — TIM Reset Bit
Setting this write-only bit resets the TIM counter and the TIM
prescaler. Setting TRST has no effect on any other registers.
Counting resumes from $0000. TRST is cleared automatically after
the TIM counter is reset and always reads as logic zero. Reset clears
the TRST bit.
1 = Prescaler and TIM counter cleared
0 = No effect
NOTE:
Setting the TSTOP and TRST bits simultaneously stops the TIM counter
at a value of $0000.
PS[2:0] — Prescaler Select Bits
These read/write bits select one of the seven prescaler outputs as the
input to the TIM counter as Table 10-2 shows. Reset clears the
PS[2:0] bits.
Table 10-2. Prescaler Selection
PS2
PS1
PS0
TIM Clock Source
0
0
0
Internal Bus Clock ÷ 1
0
0
1
Internal Bus Clock ÷ 2
0
1
0
Internal Bus Clock ÷ 4
0
1
1
Internal Bus Clock ÷ 8
1
0
0
Internal Bus Clock ÷ 16
1
0
1
Internal Bus Clock ÷ 32
1
1
0
Internal Bus Clock ÷ 64
1
1
1
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Not available
Technical Data
135
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.10.2 TIM Counter Registers (TCNTH:TCNTL)
The two read-only TIM counter registers contain the high and low bytes
of the value in the TIM counter. Reading the high byte (TCNTH) latches
the contents of the low byte (TCNTL) into a buffer. Subsequent reads of
TCNTH do not affect the latched TCNTL value until TCNTL is read.
Reset clears the TIM counter registers. Setting the TIM reset bit (TRST)
also clears the TIM counter registers.
NOTE:
If you read TCNTH during a break interrupt, be sure to unlatch TCNTL
by reading TCNTL before exiting the break interrupt. Otherwise, TCNTL
retains the value latched during the break.
Address:
Read:
$0021
TCNTH
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
$0022
TCNTL
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Write:
Reset:
Address:
Read:
Write:
Reset:
= Unimplemented
Figure 10-5. TIM Counter Registers (TCNTH:TCNTL)
Technical Data
136
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
I/O Registers
10.10.3 TIM Counter Modulo Registers (TMODH:TMODL)
The read/write TIM modulo registers contain the modulo value for the
TIM counter. When the TIM counter reaches the modulo value, the
overflow flag (TOF) becomes set, and the TIM counter resumes counting
from $0000 at the next timer clock. Writing to the high byte (TMODH)
inhibits the TOF bit and overflow interrupts until the low byte (TMODL) is
written. Reset sets the TIM counter modulo registers.
Address:
$0023
TMODH
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
$0024
TMODL
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Address:
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Figure 10-6. TIM Counter Modulo Registers (TMODH:TMODL)
NOTE:
Reset the TIM counter before writing to the TIM counter modulo registers.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
137
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.10.4 TIM Channel Status and Control Registers (TSC0:TSC1)
Each of the TIM channel status and control registers does the following:
•
Flags input captures and output compares
•
Enables input capture and output compare interrupts
•
Selects input capture, output compare, or PWM operation
•
Selects high, low, or toggling output on output compare
•
Selects rising edge, falling edge, or any edge as the active input
capture trigger
•
Selects output toggling on TIM overflow
•
Selects 0% and 100% PWM duty cycle
•
Selects buffered or unbuffered output compare/PWM operation
Address:
$0025
TSC0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
CH0IE
MS0B
MS0A
ELS0B
ELS0A
TOV0
CH0MAX
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
MS1A
ELS1B
ELS1A
TOV1
CH1MAX
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
CH0F
Write:
0
Reset:
0
0
$0028
TSC1
Bit 7
6
Address:
Read:
CH1F
0
CH1IE
Write:
0
Reset:
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 10-7. TIM Channel Status and Control Registers (TSC0:TSC1)
Technical Data
138
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
I/O Registers
CHxF — Channel x Flag Bit
When channel x is an input capture channel, this read/write bit is set
when an active edge occurs on the channel x pin. When channel x is
an output compare channel, CHxF is set when the value in the TIM
counter registers matches the value in the TIM channel x registers.
When TIM CPU interrupt requests are enabled (CHxIE=1), clear
CHxF by reading the TIM channel x status and control register with
CHxF set and then writing a logic zero to CHxF. If another interrupt
request occurs before the clearing sequence is complete, then writing
logic zero to CHxF has no effect. Therefore, an interrupt request
cannot be lost due to inadvertent clearing of CHxF.
Reset clears the CHxF bit. Writing a logic one to CHxF has no effect.
1 = Input capture or output compare on channel x
0 = No input capture or output compare on channel x
CHxIE — Channel x Interrupt Enable Bit
This read/write bit enables TIM CPU interrupt service requests on
channel x. Reset clears the CHxIE bit.
1 = Channel x CPU interrupt requests enabled
0 = Channel x CPU interrupt requests disabled
MSxB — Mode Select Bit B
This read/write bit selects buffered output compare/PWM operation.
MSxB exists only in the TIM channel 0 status and control register.
Setting MS0B disables the channel 1 status and control register and
reverts TCH1 to general-purpose I/O.
Reset clears the MSxB bit.
1 = Buffered output compare/PWM operation enabled
0 = Buffered output compare/PWM operation disabled
MSxA — Mode Select Bit A
When ELSxB:ELSxA ≠ 0:0, this read/write bit selects either input
capture operation or unbuffered output compare/PWM operation.
See Table 10-3.
1 = Unbuffered output compare/PWM operation
0 = Input capture operation
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
139
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
When ELSxB:ELSxA = 0:0, this read/write bit selects the initial output
level of the TCHx pin. (See Table 10-3.) Reset clears the MSxA bit.
1 = Initial output level low
0 = Initial output level high
NOTE:
Before changing a channel function by writing to the MSxB or MSxA bit,
set the TSTOP and TRST bits in the TIM status and control register
(TSC).
ELSxB and ELSxA — Edge/Level Select Bits
When channel x is an input capture channel, these read/write bits
control the active edge-sensing logic on channel x.
When channel x is an output compare channel, ELSxB and ELSxA
control the channel x output behavior when an output compare
occurs.
When ELSxB and ELSxA are both clear, channel x is not connected
to an I/O port, and pin TCHx is available as a general-purpose I/O pin.
Table 10-3 shows how ELSxB and ELSxA work. Reset clears the
ELSxB and ELSxA bits.
Table 10-3. Mode, Edge, and Level Selection
MSxB
MSxA
ELSxB
ELSxA
X
0
0
0
Mode
Output
Preset
Technical Data
140
X
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
X
0
1
1
X
1
0
1
X
1
1
Configuration
Pin under Port Control;
Initial Output Level High
Pin under Port Control;
Initial Output Level Low
Capture on Rising Edge Only
Input
Capture
Capture on Falling Edge Only
Capture on Rising or Falling Edge
Output
Compare
or PWM
Toggle Output on Compare
Clear Output on Compare
Set Output on Compare
Buffered
Toggle Output on Compare
Output
Compare or Clear Output on Compare
Buffered
Set Output on Compare
PWM
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
I/O Registers
NOTE:
Before enabling a TIM channel register for input capture operation, make
sure that the TCHx pin is stable for at least two bus clocks.
TOVx — Toggle-On-Overflow Bit
When channel x is an output compare channel, this read/write bit
controls the behavior of the channel x output when the TIM counter
overflows. When channel x is an input capture channel, TOVx has no
effect. Reset clears the TOVx bit.
1 = Channel x pin toggles on TIM counter overflow.
0 = Channel x pin does not toggle on TIM counter overflow.
NOTE:
When TOVx is set, a TIM counter overflow takes precedence over a
channel x output compare if both occur at the same time.
CHxMAX — Channel x Maximum Duty Cycle Bit
When the TOVx bit is at logic one, setting the CHxMAX bit forces the
duty cycle of buffered and unbuffered PWM signals to 100%. As
Figure 10-8 shows, the CHxMAX bit takes effect in the cycle after it
is set or cleared. The output stays at the 100% duty cycle level until
the cycle after CHxMAX is cleared.
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
PERIOD
TCHx
OUTPUT
COMPARE
OUTPUT
COMPARE
OUTPUT
COMPARE
OUTPUT
COMPARE
CHxMAX
Figure 10-8. CHxMAX Latency
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
Technical Data
141
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
10.10.5 TIM Channel Registers (TCH0H/L:TCH1H/L)
These read/write registers contain the captured TIM counter value of the
input capture function or the output compare value of the output
compare function. The state of the TIM channel registers after reset is
unknown.
In input capture mode (MSxB:MSxA = 0:0), reading the high byte of the
TIM channel x registers (TCHxH) inhibits input captures until the low
byte (TCHxL) is read.
In output compare mode (MSxB:MSxA ≠ 0:0), writing to the high byte of
the TIM channel x registers (TCHxH) inhibits output compares until the
low byte (TCHxL) is written.
Address:
$0026
TCH0H
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Address:
Indeterminate after reset
$0027
TCH0L
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Address:
Indeterminate after reset
$0029
TCH1H
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Address:
Indeterminate after reset
$02A
TCH1L
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Indeterminate after reset
Figure 10-9. TIM Channel Registers (TCH0H/L:TCH1H/L)
Technical Data
142
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Timer Interface Module (TIM)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 11. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
11.1 Contents
11.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.4.1 ADC Port I/O Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11.4.2 Voltage Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.4.3 Conversion Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.4.4 Continuous Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.4.5 Accuracy and Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.5
Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
11.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.7.1 ADC Voltage In (ADCVIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.8.1 ADC Status and Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.8.2 ADC Data Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11.8.3 ADC Input Clock Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11.2 Introduction
This section describes the 12-channel, 8-bit linear successive
approximation analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Technical Data
143
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
11.3 Features
Features of the ADC module include:
Addr.
$003C
$003D
•
12 channels with multiplexed input
•
Linear successive approximation with monotonicity
•
8-bit resolution
•
Single or continuous conversion
•
Conversion complete flag or conversion complete interrupt
•
Selectable ADC clock
Register Name
Bit 7
Read:
ADC Status and Control
Register Write:
(ADSCR)
Reset:
Read:
ADC Data Register
Write:
(ADR)
Reset:
Read:
ADC Input Clock Register
$003E
Write:
(ADICLK)
Reset:
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
AIEN
ADCO
ADCH4
ADCH3
ADCH2
ADCH1
ADCH0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
COCO
Indeterminate after reset
ADIV2
ADIV1
ADIV0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 11-1. ADC I/O Register Summary
11.4 Functional Description
Twelve ADC channels are available for sampling external sources at
pins PTB0–PTB7 and PTD0–PTD3. An analog multiplexer allows the
single ADC converter to select one of the 12 ADC channels as ADC
voltage input (ADCVIN). ADCVIN is converted by the successive
approximation register-based counters. The ADC resolution is 8 bits.
When the conversion is completed, ADC puts the result in the ADC data
register and sets a flag or generates an interrupt. Figure 11-2 shows a
block diagram of the ADC.
Technical Data
144
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Functional Description
INTERNAL
DATA BUS
READ DDRB/DDRD
DISABLE
WRITE DDRB/DDRD
DDRBx/DDRDx
RESET
WRITE PTB/PTD
ADCx
PTBx/PTDx
READ PTB/PTD
DISABLE
ADC CHANNEL x
ADC DATA REGISTER
INTERRUPT
LOGIC
AIEN
CONVERSION
COMPLETE
ADC
ADC VOLTAGE IN
ADCVIN
CHANNEL
SELECT
(1 OF 12 CHANNELS)
ADCH[4:0]
ADC CLOCK
COCO
CLOCK
GENERATOR
BUS CLOCK
ADIV[2:0]
ADICLK
Figure 11-2. ADC Block Diagram
11.4.1 ADC Port I/O Pins
PTB0–PTB7 and PTD0–PTD3 are general-purpose I/O pins that are
shared with the ADC channels. The channel select bits (ADC status and
control register, $003C), define which ADC channel/port pin will be used
as the input signal. The ADC overrides the port I/O logic by forcing that
pin as input to the ADC. The remaining ADC channels/port pins are
controlled by the port I/O logic and can be used as general-purpose I/O.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Technical Data
145
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Writes to the port register or DDR will not have any affect on the port pin
that is selected by the ADC. Read of a port pin which is in use by the
ADC will return a logic 0 if the corresponding DDR bit is at logic 0. If the
DDR bit is at logic 1, the value in the port data latch is read.
11.4.2 Voltage Conversion
When the input voltage to the ADC equals VDD, the ADC converts the
signal to $FF (full scale). If the input voltage equals VSS, the ADC
converts it to $00. Input voltages between VDD and VSS are a
straight-line linear conversion. All other input voltages will result in $FF
if greater than VDD and $00 if less than VSS.
NOTE:
Input voltage should not exceed the analog supply voltages.
11.4.3 Conversion Time
Fourteen ADC internal clocks are required to perform one conversion.
The ADC starts a conversion on the first rising edge of the ADC internal
clock immediately following a write to the ADSCR. If the ADC internal
clock is selected to run at 1MHz, then one conversion will take 14µs to
complete. With a 1MHz ADC internal clock the maximum sample rate is
71.43kHz.
Conversion Time =
14 ADC Clock Cycles
ADC Clock Frequency
Number of Bus Cycles = Conversion Time × Bus Frequency
11.4.4 Continuous Conversion
In the continuous conversion mode, the ADC continuously converts the
selected channel filling the ADC data register with new data after each
conversion. Data from the previous conversion will be overwritten
whether that data has been read or not. Conversions will continue until
the ADCO bit is cleared. The COCO bit (ADC status and control register,
$003C) is set after each conversion and can be cleared by writing the
ADC status and control register or reading of the ADC data register.
Technical Data
146
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Interrupts
11.4.5 Accuracy and Precision
The conversion process is monotonic and has no missing codes.
11.5 Interrupts
When the AIEN bit is set, the ADC module is capable of generating a
CPU interrupt after each ADC conversion. A CPU interrupt is generated
if the COCO bit is at logic 0. The COCO bit is not used as a conversion
complete flag when interrupts are enabled.
11.6 Low-Power Modes
The following subsections describe the ADC in low-power modes.
11.6.1 Wait Mode
The ADC continues normal operation during wait mode. Any enabled
CPU interrupt request from the ADC can bring the MCU out of wait
mode. If the ADC is not required to bring the MCU out of wait mode,
power down the ADC by setting the ADCH[4:0] bits in the ADC status
and control register to logic 1’s before executing the WAIT instruction.
11.6.2 Stop Mode
The ADC module is inactive after the execution of a STOP instruction.
Any pending conversion is aborted. ADC conversions resume when the
MCU exits stop mode. Allow one conversion cycle to stabilize the analog
circuitry before attempting a new ADC conversion after exiting stop
mode.
11.7 I/O Signals
The ADC module has 12 channels that are shared with I/O port B and
port D.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Technical Data
147
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
11.7.1 ADC Voltage In (ADCVIN)
ADCVIN is the input voltage signal from one of the 12 ADC channels to
the ADC module.
11.8 I/O Registers
These I/O registers control and monitor ADC operation:
•
ADC status and control register (ADSCR)
•
ADC data register (ADR)
•
ADC clock register (ADICLK)
11.8.1 ADC Status and Control Register
The following paragraphs describe the function of the ADC status and
control register.
Address:
$003C
Bit 7
Read:
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
AIEN
ADCO
ADCH4
ADCH3
ADCH2
ADCH1
ADCH0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
COCO
Write:
Reset:
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 11-3. ADC Status and Control Register (ADSCR)
COCO — Conversions Complete Bit
When the AIEN bit is a logic 0, the COCO is a read-only bit which is
set each time a conversion is completed. This bit is cleared whenever
the ADC status and control register is written or whenever the ADC
data register is read. Reset clears this bit.
1 = Conversion completed (AIEN = 0)
0 = Conversion not completed (AIEN = 0)
When the AIEN bit is a logic 1 (CPU interrupt enabled), the COCO is
a read-only bit, and will always be logic 0 when read.
Technical Data
148
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
I/O Registers
AIEN — ADC Interrupt Enable Bit
When this bit is set, an interrupt is generated at the end of an ADC
conversion. The interrupt signal is cleared when the data register is
read or the status/control register is written. Reset clears the AIEN bit.
1 = ADC interrupt enabled
0 = ADC interrupt disabled
ADCO — ADC Continuous Conversion Bit
When set, the ADC will convert samples continuously and update the
ADR register at the end of each conversion. Only one conversion is
allowed when this bit is cleared. Reset clears the ADCO bit.
1 = Continuous ADC conversion
0 = One ADC conversion
ADCH[4:0] — ADC Channel Select Bits
ADCH[4:0] form a 5-bit field which is used to select one of the ADC
channels. The five channel select bits are detailed in the following
table. Care should be taken when using a port pin as both an analog
and a digital input simultaneously to prevent switching noise from
corrupting the analog signal. (See Table 11-1.)
The ADC subsystem is turned off when the channel select bits are all
set to one. This feature allows for reduced power consumption for the
MCU when the ADC is not used. Reset sets all of these bits to a
logic 1.
NOTE:
Recovery from the disabled state requires one conversion cycle to
stabilize.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Technical Data
149
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Table 11-1. MUX Channel Select
ADCH4
ADCH3
ADCH2
ADCH1
ADCH0
ADC Channel
Input Select
0
0
0
0
0
ADC0
PTB0
0
0
0
0
1
ADC1
PTB1
0
0
0
1
0
ADC2
PTB2
0
0
0
1
1
ADC3
PTB3
0
0
1
0
0
ADC4
PTB4
0
0
1
0
1
ADC5
PTB5
0
0
1
1
0
ADC6
PTB6
0
0
1
1
1
ADC7
PTB7
0
1
0
0
0
ADC8
PTD3
0
1
0
0
1
ADC9
PTD2
0
1
0
1
0
ADC10
PTD1
0
1
0
1
1
ADC11
PTD0
0
1
1
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
—
Unused
(see Note 1)
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
—
Reserved
1
1
1
0
0
—
Unused
1
1
1
0
1
VDDA (see Note 2)
1
1
1
1
0
VSSA (see Note 2)
1
1
1
1
1
ADC power off
NOTES:
1. If any unused channels are selected, the resulting ADC conversion will be unknown.
2. The voltage levels supplied from internal reference nodes as specified in the table are used to verify the
operation of the ADC converter both in production test and for user applications.
Technical Data
150
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
I/O Registers
11.8.2 ADC Data Register
One 8-bit result register is provided. This register is updated each time
an ADC conversion completes.
Address:
Read:
$003D
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
Write:
Reset:
Indeterminate after reset
= Unimplemented
Figure 11-4. ADC Data Register (ADR)
11.8.3 ADC Input Clock Register
This register selects the clock frequency for the ADC.
Address:
$003E
Bit 7
6
5
ADIV2
ADIV1
ADIV0
0
0
0
Read:
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Write:
Reset:
= Unimplemented
Figure 11-5. ADC Input Clock Register (ADICLK)
ADIV[2:0] — ADC Clock Prescaler Bits
ADIV[2:0] form a 3-bit field which selects the divide ratio used by the
ADC to generate the internal ADC clock. Table 11-2 shows the
available clock configurations. The ADC clock should be set to
approximately 1MHz.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Technical Data
151
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Table 11-2. ADC Clock Divide Ratio
ADIV2
ADIV1
ADIV0
ADC Clock Rate
0
0
0
ADC Input Clock ÷ 1
0
0
1
ADC Input Clock ÷ 2
0
1
0
ADC Input Clock ÷ 4
0
1
1
ADC Input Clock ÷ 8
1
X
X
ADC Input Clock ÷ 16
X = don’t care
Technical Data
152
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 12. Input/Output (I/O) Ports
12.1 Contents
12.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12.3 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.3.1 Port A Data Register (PTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.3.2 Data Direction Register A (DDRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.3.3 Port A Input Pull-up Enable Register (PTAPUE) . . . . . . . . 158
12.4 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12.4.1 Port B Data Register (PTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12.4.2 Data Direction Register B (DDRB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
12.5 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12.5.1 Port D Data Register (PTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.5.2 Data Direction Register D (DDRD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12.5.3 Port D Control Register (PDCR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.2 Introduction
Twenty three (23) bidirectional input-output (I/O) pins form three parallel
ports. All I/O pins are programmable as inputs or outputs.
NOTE:
Connect any unused I/O pins to an appropriate logic level, either VDD or
VSS. Although the I/O ports do not require termination for proper
operation, termination reduces excess current consumption and the
possibility of electrostatic damage.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
153
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
Read:
$0000
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PTA6
PTA5
PTA4
PTA3
PTA2
PTA1
PTA0
PTB2
PTB1
PTB0
PTD2
PTD1
PTD0
0
Port A Data Register
Write:
(PTA)
Reset:
Unaffected by reset
Read:
$0001
Port B Data Register
Write:
(PTB)
Reset:
PTB7
PTB6
PTB5
PTB4
PTB3
Unaffected by reset
Read:
$0003
Port D Data Register
Write:
(PTD)
Reset:
Read:
$0004
Data Direction Register A
Write:
(DDRA)
Reset:
PTD7
PTD6
PTD5
PTD4
PTD3
Unaffected by reset
0
0
DDRA6
DDRA5
DDRA4
DDRA3
DDRA2
DDRA1
DDRA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDRB6
DDRB5
DDRB4
DDRB3
DDRB2
DDRB1
DDRB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDRD6
DDRD5
DDRD4
DDRD3
DDRD2
DDRD1
DDRD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
$0005
DDRB7
Data Direction Register B
Write:
(DDRB)
Reset:
0
Read:
$0007
DDRD7
Data Direction Register D
Write:
(DDRD)
Reset:
0
Read:
$000A
$000D
Port D Control Register
Write:
(PDCR)
Reset:
0
SLOWD7 SLOWD6 PTDPU7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTDPU6
0
Read:
Port A Input Pull-up
PTA6EN PTAPUE6 PTAPUE5 PTAPUE4 PTAPUE3 PTAPUE2 PTAPUE1 PTAPUE0
Enable Register Write:
(PTAPUE)
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 12-1. I/O Port Register Summary
Technical Data
154
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Introduction
Table 12-1. Port Control Register Bits Summary
Module Control
Port
Bit
DDR
Pin
Module
Control Bit
0
DDRA0
KBIE0
PTA0/KBI0
1
DDRA1
KBIE1
PTA1/KBI1
2
DDRA2
KBIE2
PTA2/KBI2
KBI
A
Register
KBIER ($001B)
3
DDRA3
KBIE3
PTA3/KBI3
4
DDRA4
KBIE4
PTA4/KBI4
5
DDRA5
KBIE5
PTA5/KBI5
6
DDRA6
PTA6EN
KBIE6
RCCLK/PTA6/KBI6(1)
0
DDRB0
PTB0/ADC0
1
DDRB1
PTB1/ADC1
2
DDRB2
PTB2/ADC2
3
DDRB3
B
OSC
KBI
PTAPUE ($000D)
KBIER ($001B)
PTB3/ADC3
ADC
ADSCR ($003C)
ADCH[4:0]
4
DDRB4
PTB4/ADC4
5
DDRB5
PTB5/ADC5
6
DDRB6
PTB6/ADC6
7
DDRB7
PTB7/ADC7
0
DDRD0
PTD0/ADC11
1
DDRD1
PTD1/ADC10
ADC
ADSCR ($003C)
ADCH[4:0]
2
DDRD2
PTD2/ADC9
3
DDRD3
PTD3/ADC8
4
DDRD4
D
TSC0 ($0025)
ELS0B:ELS0A
PTD4/TCH0
TSC1 ($0028)
ELS1B:ELS1A
PTD5/TCH1
TIM
5
DDRD5
6
DDRD6
—
—
—
PTD6
7
DDRD7
—
—
—
PTD7
Notes:
1. RCCLK/PTA6/KBI6 pin is only available on MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E devices (RC option);
PTAPUE register has priority control over the port pin.
RCCLK/PTA6/KBI6 is the OSC2 pin on MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E devices (X-TAL option).
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
155
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
12.3 Port A
Port A is an 7-bit special function port that shares all seven of its pins
with the keyboard interrupt (KBI) module (see Section 14. Keyboard
Interrupt Module (KBI)). Each port A pin also has software configurable
pull-up device if the corresponding port pin is configured as input port.
PTA0 to PTA5 has direct LED drive capability.
NOTE:
PTA0–PTA5 pins are available on MC68H(R)C908JL3E only.
PTA6 pin is available on MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E only.
12.3.1 Port A Data Register (PTA)
The port A data register (PTA) contains a data latch for each of the seven
port A pins.
Address:
$0000
Bit 7
Read:
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PTA6
PTA5
PTA4
PTA3
PTA2
PTA1
PTA0
LED
(Sink)
LED
(Sink)
LED
(Sink)
0
Write:
Reset:
Additional Functions:
Unaffected by Reset
LED
(Sink)
LED
(Sink)
LED
(Sink)
30k pull-up 30k pull-up 30k pull-up 30k pull-up 30k pull-up 30k pull-up 30k pull-up
Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard
Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt
Figure 12-2. Port A Data Register (PTA)
PTA[6:0] — Port A Data Bits
These read/write bits are software programmable. Data direction of
each port A pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data
direction register A. Reset has no effect on port A data.
KBI[6:0] — Port A Keyboard Interrupts
The keyboard interrupt enable bits, KBIE[6:0], in the keyboard
interrupt control register (KBIER) enable the port A pins as external
interrupt pins, (see Section 14. Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)).
Technical Data
156
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Port A
12.3.2 Data Direction Register A (DDRA)
Data direction register A determines whether each port A pin is an input
or an output. Writing a logic one to a DDRA bit enables the output buffer
for the corresponding port A pin; a logic zero disables the output buffer.
Address:
$0004
Bit 7
Read:
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
DDRA6
DDRA5
DDRA4
DDRA3
DDRA2
DDRA1
DDRA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Write:
Reset:
0
Figure 12-3. Data Direction Register A (DDRA)
DDRA[6:0] — Data Direction Register A Bits
These read/write bits control port A data direction. Reset clears
DDRA[6:0], configuring all port A pins as inputs.
1 = Corresponding port A pin configured as output
0 = Corresponding port A pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port A pins by writing to the port A data register before
changing data direction register A bits from 0 to 1.
Figure 12-4 shows the port A I/O logic.
READ DDRA ($0004)
PTAPUEx
INTERNAL DATA BUS
WRITE DDRA ($0004)
RESET
DDRAx
30k
WRITE PTA ($0000)
PTAx
PTAx
READ PTA ($0000)
To Keyboard Interrupt Circuit
Figure 12-4. Port A I/O Circuit
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
157
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
When DDRAx is a logic 1, reading address $0000 reads the PTAx data
latch. When DDRAx is a logic 0, reading address $0000 reads the
voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless
of the state of its data direction bit.
12.3.3 Port A Input Pull-up Enable Register (PTAPUE)
The port A input pull-up enable register (PTAPUE) contains a software
configurable pull-up device for each of the seven port A pins. Each bit is
individually configurable and requires the corresponding data direction
register, DDRAx be configured as input. Each pull-up device is
automatically and dynamically disabled when its corresponding DDRAx
bit is configured as output.
Address:
$000D
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Read:
PTA6EN PTAPUE6 PTAPUE5 PTAPUE4 PTAPUE3 PTAPUE2 PTAPUE1 PTAPUE0
Write:
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 12-5. Port A Input Pull-up Enable Register (PTAPUE)
PTA6EN — Enable PTA6 on OSC2
This read/write bit configures the OSC2 pin function when RC
oscillator option is selected. This bit has no effect for X-tal oscillator
option.
1 = OSC2 pin configured for PTA6 I/O, and has all the interrupt and
pull-up functions
0 = OSC2 pin outputs the RC oscillator clock (RCCLK)
PTAPUE[6:0] — Port A Input Pull-up Enable Bits
These read/write bits are software programmable to enable pull-up
devices on port A pins
1 = Corresponding port A pin configured to have internal pull-up if
its DDRA bit is set to 0
0 = Pull-up device is disconnected on the corresponding port A pin
regardless of the state of its DDRA bit
Technical Data
158
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Port B
Table 12-2 summarizes the operation of the port A pins.
Table 12-2. Port A Pin Functions
Accesses to DDRA
DDRA
Bit
PTA Bit
1
0
X(1)
0
0
X
1
PTAPUE Bit
Accesses to PTA
I/O Pin Mode
Read/Write
Read
Write
Input, VDD(2)
DDRA[6:0]
Pin
PTA[6:0](3)
X
Input, Hi-Z(4)
DDRA[6:0]
Pin
PTA[6:0](3)
X
Output
DDRA[6:0]
PTA[6:0]
PTA[6:0]
Notes:
1. X = Don’t care.
2. I/O pin pulled to VDD by internal pull-up.
3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect input.
4. Hi-Z = High Impedance.
12.4 Port B
Port B is an 8-bit special function port that shares all eight of its port pins
with the analog-to-digital converter (ADC) module, see Section 11.
12.4.1 Port B Data Register (PTB)
The port B data register contains a data latch for each of the eight port B
pins.
Address:
$0001
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PTB7
PTB6
PTB5
PTB4
PTB3
PTB2
PTB1
PTB0
ADC2
ADC2
ADC0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Alternative Function:
Unaffected by reset
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
ADC4
ADC3
Figure 12-6. Port B Data Register (PTB)
PTB[7:0] — Port B Data Bits
These read/write bits are software programmable. Data direction of
each port B pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data
direction register B. Reset has no effect on port B data.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
159
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
ADC[7:0] — ADC channels 7 to 0
ADC[7:0] are pins used for the input channels to the analog-to-digital
converter module. The channel select bits, ADCH[4:0], in the ADC
status and control register define which port pin will be used as an
ADC input and overrides any control from the port I/O logic. See
Section 11. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC).
12.4.2 Data Direction Register B (DDRB)
Data direction register B determines whether each port B pin is an input
or an output. Writing a logic one to a DDRB bit enables the output buffer
for the corresponding port B pin; a logic zero disables the output buffer.
Address:
$0005
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
DDRB7
DDRB6
DDRB5
DDRB4
DDRB3
DDRB2
DDRB1
DDRB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Figure 12-7. Data Direction Register B (DDRB)
DDRB[7:0] — Data Direction Register B Bits
These read/write bits control port B data direction. Reset clears
DDRB[7:0], configuring all port B pins as inputs.
1 = Corresponding port B pin configured as output
0 = Corresponding port B pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port B pins by writing to the port B data register before
changing data direction register B bits from 0 to 1. Figure 12-8 shows
the port B I/O logic.
Technical Data
160
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Port D
READ DDRB ($0005)
INTERNAL DATA BUS
WRITE DDRB ($0005)
DDRBx
RESET
WRITE PTB ($0001)
PTBx
PTBx
READ PTB ($0001)
To Analog-To-Digital Converter
Figure 12-8. Port B I/O Circuit
When DDRBx is a logic 1, reading address $0001 reads the PTBx data
latch. When DDRBx is a logic 0, reading address $0001 reads the
voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless
of the state of its data direction bit. Table 12-3 summarizes the operation
of the port B pins.
Table 12-3. Port B Pin Functions
Accesses to DDRB
DDRB Bit
PTB Bit
0
X(1)
1
X
Accesses to PTB
I/O Pin Mode
Input, Hi-Z
(2)
Output
Read/Write
Read
Write
DDRB[7:0]
Pin
PTB[7:0](3)
DDRB[7:0]
Pin
PTB[7:0]
Notes:
1. X = don’t care.
2. Hi-Z = high impedance.
3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect the input.
12.5 Port D
Port D is an 8-bit special function port that shares two of its pins with
timer interface module, (see Section 10.) and shares four of its pins with
analog-to-digital converter module (see Section 11.). PTD6 and PTD7
each has high current drive (25mA sink) and programmable pull-up.
PTD2, PTD3, PTD6 and PTD7 each has LED driving (sink) capability.
NOTE:
PTD0–PTD1 are available on MC68H(R)C908JL3E only.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
161
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
12.5.1 Port D Data Register (PTD)
The port D data register contains a data latch for each of the eight port D
pins.
Address:
$0003
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PTD7
PTD6
PTD5
PTD4
PTD3
PTD2
PTD1
PTD0
ADC10
ADC11
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Additional Functions
Unaffected by reset
LED
(Sink)
LED
(Sink)
TCH1
LED
(Sink)
LED
(Sink)
ADC8
ADC9
TCH0
25mA sink 25mA sink
(Slow Edge) (Slow Edge)
5k pull-up 5k pull-up
Figure 12-9. Port D Data Register (PTD)
PTD[7:0] — Port D Data Bits
These read/write bits are software programmable. Data direction of
each port D pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data
direction register D. Reset has no effect on port D data.
ADC[11:8] — ADC channels 11 to 8
ADC[11:8] are pins used for the input channels to the analog-to-digital
converter module. The channel select bits, ADCH[4:0], in the ADC
status and control register define which port pin will be used as an
ADC input and overrides any control from the port I/O logic. See
Section 11. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC).
TCH[1:0] — Timer Channel I/O
The TCH1 and TCH0 pins are the TIM input capture/output compare
pins. The edge/level select bits, ELSxB:ELSxA, determine whether
the PTD4/TCH0 and PTD5/TCH1 pins are timer channel I/O pins or
general-purpose I/O pins. See Section 10. Timer Interface Module
(TIM).
Technical Data
162
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Port D
12.5.2 Data Direction Register D (DDRD)
Data direction register D determines whether each port D pin is an input
or an output. Writing a logic one to a DDRD bit enables the output buffer
for the corresponding port D pin; a logic zero disables the output buffer.
Address:
$0007
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
DDRD7
DDRD6
DDRD5
DDRD4
DDRD3
DDRD2
DDRD1
DDRD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Figure 12-10. Data Direction Register D (DDRD)
DDRD[7:0] — Data Direction Register D Bits
These read/write bits control port D data direction. Reset clears
DDRD[7:0], configuring all port D pins as inputs.
1 = Corresponding port D pin configured as output
0 = Corresponding port D pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port D pins by writing to the port D data register before
changing data direction register D bits from 0 to 1. Figure 12-11 shows
the port D I/O logic.
READ DDRD ($0007)
PTDPU[6:7]
INTERNAL DATA BUS
WRITE DDRD ($0007)
RESET
DDRDx
5k
WRITE PTD ($0003)
PTDx
PTDx
READ PTD ($0003)
PTD[0:3] To Analog-To-Digital Converter
PTD[4:5] To Timer
Figure 12-11. Port D I/O Circuit
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
163
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
When DDRDx is a logic 1, reading address $0003 reads the PTDx data
latch. When DDRDx is a logic 0, reading address $0003 reads the
voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless
of the state of its data direction bit. Table 12-4 summarizes the operation
of the port D pins.
Table 12-4. Port D Pin Functions
DDRD
Bit
PTD Bit
0
X
1
(1)
X
Accesses
to DDRD
I/O Pin
Mode
(2)
Input, Hi-Z
Output
Accesses to PTD
Read/Write
Read
Write
DDRD[7:0]
Pin
PTD[7:0](3)
DDRD[7:0]
Pin
PTD[7:0]
Notes:
1. X = don’t care.
2. Hi-Z = high impedance.
3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect the input.
12.5.3 Port D Control Register (PDCR)
The port D control register enables/disables the pull-up resistor and
slow-edge high current capability of pins PTD6 and PTD7.
Address:
Read:
$000A
Bit 7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
Bit 0
SLOWD7 SLOWD6 PTDPU7
PTDPU6
Write:
Reset:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 12-12. Port D Control Register (PDCR)
SLOWDx — Slow Edge Enable
The SLOWD6 and SLOWD7 bits enable the Slow-edge, open-drain,
high current output (25mA sink) of port pins PTD6 and PTD7
respectively. DDRDx bit is not affected by SLOWDx.
1 = Slow edge enabled; pin is open-drain output
0 = Slow edge disabled; pin is push-pull
PTDPUx — Pull-up Enable
The PTDPU6 and PTDPU7 bits enable the 5kΩ pull-up on PTD6 and
PTD7 respectively, regardless the status of DDRDx bit.
1 = Enable 5kΩ pull-up
0 = Disable 5kΩ pull-up
Technical Data
164
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 13. External Interrupt (IRQ)
13.1 Contents
13.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
13.4.1 IRQ1 Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.5
IRQ Module During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
13.6
IRQ Status and Control Register (INTSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.2 Introduction
The IRQ (external interrupt) module provides a maskable interrupt input.
13.3 Features
Features of the IRQ module include the following:
•
A dedicated external interrupt pin, IRQ1
•
IRQ1 interrupt control bits
•
Hysteresis buffer
•
Programmable edge-only or edge and level interrupt sensitivity
•
Automatic interrupt acknowledge
•
Selectable internal pullup resistor
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
External Interrupt (IRQ)
165
External Interrupt (IRQ)
13.4 Functional Description
A logic zero applied to the external interrupt pin can latch a CPU interrupt
request. Figure 13-1 shows the structure of the IRQ module.
Interrupt signals on the IRQ1 pin are latched into the IRQ1 latch. An
interrupt latch remains set until one of the following actions occurs:
•
Vector fetch — A vector fetch automatically generates an interrupt
acknowledge signal that clears the IRQ latch.
•
Software clear — Software can clear the interrupt latch by writing
to the acknowledge bit in the interrupt status and control register
(INTSCR). Writing a logic one to the ACK1 bit clears the IRQ1
latch.
•
Reset — A reset automatically clears the interrupt latch.
The external interrupt pin is falling-edge-triggered and is softwareconfigurable to be either falling-edge or falling-edge and low-leveltriggered. The MODE1 bit in the INTSCR controls the triggering
sensitivity of the IRQ1 pin.
When the interrupt pin is edge-triggered only, the CPU interrupt request
remains set until a vector fetch, software clear, or reset occurs.
When the interrupt pin is both falling-edge and low-level-triggered, the
CPU interrupt request remains set until both of the following occur:
•
Vector fetch or software clear
•
Return of the interrupt pin to logic one
The vector fetch or software clear may occur before or after the interrupt
pin returns to logic one. As long as the pin is low, the interrupt request
remains pending. A reset will clear the latch and the MODE1 control bit,
thereby clearing the interrupt even if the pin stays low.
When set, the IMASK1 bit in the INTSCR mask all external interrupt
requests. A latched interrupt request is not presented to the interrupt
priority logic unless the IMASK1 bit is clear.
Technical Data
166
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
External Interrupt (IRQ)
MOTOROLA
External Interrupt (IRQ)
Functional Description
NOTE:
The interrupt mask (I) in the condition code register (CCR) masks all
interrupt requests, including external interrupt requests.(See 7.6
Exception Control.)
INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS
ACK1
RESET
TO CPU FOR
BIL/BIH
INSTRUCTIONS
VECTOR
FETCH
DECODER
VDD
IRQPUD
INTERNAL
VDD
IRQF1
PULLUP
DEVICE
D
CLR
Q
CK
IRQ1
SYNCHRONIZER
IRQ1
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
HIGH
VOLTAGE
DETECT
TO MODE
SELECT
LOGIC
IRQ1
FF
IMASK1
MODE1
Figure 13-1. IRQ Module Block Diagram
Addr.
$001D
Register Name
Read:
IRQ Status and Control
Register Write:
(INTSCR)
Reset:
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
IRQF1
0
ACK1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Bit 0
IMASK1
MODE1
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-2. IRQ I/O Register Summary
13.4.1 IRQ1 Pin
A logic zero on the IRQ1 pin can latch an interrupt request into the IRQ1
latch. A vector fetch, software clear, or reset clears the IRQ1 latch.
If the MODE1 bit is set, the IRQ1 pin is both falling-edge-sensitive and
low-level-sensitive. With MODE1 set, both of the following actions must
occur to clear IRQ1:
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
External Interrupt (IRQ)
167
External Interrupt (IRQ)
•
Vector fetch or software clear — A vector fetch generates an
interrupt acknowledge signal to clear the latch. Software may
generate the interrupt acknowledge signal by writing a logic one to
the ACK1 bit in the interrupt status and control register (INTSCR).
The ACK1 bit is useful in applications that poll the IRQ1 pin and
require software to clear the IRQ1 latch. Writing to the ACK1 bit
prior to leaving an interrupt service routine can also prevent
spurious interrupts due to noise. Setting ACK1 does not affect
subsequent transitions on the IRQ1 pin. A falling edge that occurs
after writing to the ACK1 bit latches another interrupt request. If
the IRQ1 mask bit, IMASK1, is clear, the CPU loads the program
counter with the vector address at locations $FFFA and $FFFB.
•
Return of the IRQ1 pin to logic one — As long as the IRQ1 pin is
at logic zero, IRQ1 remains active.
The vector fetch or software clear and the return of the IRQ1 pin to logic
one may occur in any order. The interrupt request remains pending as
long as the IRQ1 pin is at logic zero. A reset will clear the latch and the
MODE1 control bit, thereby clearing the interrupt even if the pin stays
low.
If the MODE1 bit is clear, the IRQ1 pin is falling-edge-sensitive only. With
MODE1 clear, a vector fetch or software clear immediately clears the
IRQ1 latch.
The IRQF1 bit in the INTSCR register can be used to check for pending
interrupts. The IRQF1 bit is not affected by the IMASK1 bit, which makes
it useful in applications where polling is preferred.
Use the BIH or BIL instruction to read the logic level on the IRQ1 pin.
NOTE:
When using the level-sensitive interrupt trigger, avoid false interrupts by
masking interrupt requests in the interrupt routine.
NOTE:
An internal pull-up resistor to VDD is connected to the IRQ1 pin; this can
be disabled by setting the IRQPUD bit in the CONFIG2 register ($001E).
Technical Data
168
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
External Interrupt (IRQ)
MOTOROLA
External Interrupt (IRQ)
IRQ Module During Break Interrupts
13.5 IRQ Module During Break Interrupts
The system integration module (SIM) controls whether the IRQ1 latch
can be cleared during the break state. The BCFE bit in the break flag
control register (BFCR) enables software to clear the latches during the
break state. (See Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM).)
To allow software to clear the IRQ1 latch during a break interrupt, write
a logic one to the BCFE bit. If a latch is cleared during the break state, it
remains cleared when the MCU exits the break state.
To protect the latches during the break state, write a logic zero to the
BCFE bit. With BCFE at logic zero (its default state), writing to the ACK1
bit in the IRQ status and control register during the break state has no
effect on the IRQ latch.
13.6 IRQ Status and Control Register (INTSCR)
The IRQ status and control register (INTSCR) controls and monitors
operation of the IRQ module. The INTSCR has the following functions:
•
Shows the state of the IRQ1 flag
•
Clears the IRQ1 latch
•
Masks IRQ1 and interrupt request
•
Controls triggering sensitivity of the IRQ1 interrupt pin
Address:
Read:
$001D
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
0
0
0
0
IRQF1
Write:
Reset:
2
1
Bit 0
IMASK1
MODE1
0
0
ACK1
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-3. IRQ Status and Control Register (INTSCR)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
External Interrupt (IRQ)
169
External Interrupt (IRQ)
IRQF1 — IRQ1 Flag
This read-only status bit is high when the IRQ1 interrupt is pending.
1 = IRQ1 interrupt pending
0 = IRQ1 interrupt not pending
ACK1 — IRQ1 Interrupt Request Acknowledge Bit
Writing a logic one to this write-only bit clears the IRQ1 latch. ACK1
always reads as logic zero. Reset clears ACK1.
IMASK1 — IRQ1 Interrupt Mask Bit
Writing a logic one to this read/write bit disables IRQ1 interrupt
requests. Reset clears IMASK1.
1 = IRQ1 interrupt requests disabled
0 = IRQ1 interrupt requests enabled
MODE1 — IRQ1 Edge/Level Select Bit
This read/write bit controls the triggering sensitivity of the IRQ1 pin.
Reset clears MODE1.
1 = IRQ1 interrupt requests on falling edges and low levels
0 = IRQ1 interrupt requests on falling edges only
Address:
$001E
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
IRQPUD
R
R
LVIT1
LVIT0
R
R
R
Reset:
0
0
0
Not affected
Not affected
0
0
0
POR:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
R
= Reserved
Figure 13-4. Configuration Register 2 (CONFIG2)
IRQPUD — IRQ1 Pin Pull-up control bit
1 = Internal pull-up is disconnected
0 = Internal pull-up is connected between IRQ1 pin and VDD
Technical Data
170
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
External Interrupt (IRQ)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 14. Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
14.1 Contents
14.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
14.4.1 Keyboard Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
14.4.2 Keyboard Status and Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
14.4.3 Keyboard Interrupt Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
14.5 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
14.5.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14.5.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14.6
Keyboard Module During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
14.2 Introduction
The keyboard interrupt module (KBI) provides seven independently
maskable external interrupts which are accessible via PTA0–PTA6 pins.
14.3 Features
Features of the keyboard interrupt module include the following:
•
Seven keyboard interrupt pins with separate keyboard interrupt
enable bits and one keyboard interrupt mask
•
Software configurable pull-up device if input pin is configured as
input port bit
•
Programmable edge-only or edge- and level- interrupt sensitivity
•
Exit from low-power modes
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Technical Data
171
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Addr.
Register Name
$001A
$001B
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
Read:
Keyboard Status
and Control Register Write:
(KBSCR)
Reset:
0
0
0
0
KEYF
0
Read:
Keyboard Interrupt
Enable Register Write:
(KBIER)
Reset:
0
1
Bit 0
IMASKK
MODEK
ACKK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
KBIE6
KBIE5
KBIE4
KBIE3
KBIE2
KBIE1
KBIE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-1. KBI I/O Register Summary
14.4 Functional Description
INTERNAL BUS
KBI0
ACKK
VDD
VECTOR FETCH
DECODER
KEYF
RESET
.
KBIE0
D
CLR
Q
SYNCHRONIZER
.
CK
TO PULLUP ENABLE
.
KEYBOARD
INTERRUPT FF
KBI6
Keyboard
Interrupt
Request
IMASKK
MODEK
KBIE6
TO PULLUP ENABLE
Figure 14-2. Keyboard Interrupt Block Diagram
Writing to the KBIE6–KBIE0 bits in the keyboard interrupt enable register
independently enables or disables each port A pin as a keyboard
interrupt pin. Enabling a keyboard interrupt pin in port A also enables its
internal pull-up device irrespective of PTAPUEx bits in the port A input
pull-up enable register (see 12.3.3 Port A Input Pull-up Enable
Register (PTAPUE)). A logic 0 applied to an enabled keyboard interrupt
pin latches a keyboard interrupt request.
Technical Data
172
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
MOTOROLA
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Functional Description
A keyboard interrupt is latched when one or more keyboard pins goes
low after all were high. The MODEK bit in the keyboard status and
control register controls the triggering mode of the keyboard interrupt.
•
If the keyboard interrupt is edge-sensitive only, a falling edge on a
keyboard pin does not latch an interrupt request if another
keyboard pin is already low. To prevent losing an interrupt request
on one pin because another pin is still low, software can disable
the latter pin while it is low.
•
If the keyboard interrupt is falling edge- and low level-sensitive, an
interrupt request is present as long as any keyboard pin is low.
If the MODEK bit is set, the keyboard interrupt pins are both falling edgeand low level-sensitive, and both of the following actions must occur to
clear a keyboard interrupt request:
•
Vector fetch or software clear — A vector fetch generates an
interrupt acknowledge signal to clear the interrupt request.
Software may generate the interrupt acknowledge signal by
writing a logic 1 to the ACKK bit in the keyboard status and control
register KBSCR. The ACKK bit is useful in applications that poll
the keyboard interrupt pins and require software to clear the
keyboard interrupt request. Writing to the ACKK bit prior to leaving
an interrupt service routine can also prevent spurious interrupts
due to noise. Setting ACKK does not affect subsequent transitions
on the keyboard interrupt pins. A falling edge that occurs after
writing to the ACKK bit latches another interrupt request. If the
keyboard interrupt mask bit, IMASKK, is clear, the CPU loads the
program counter with the vector address at locations $FFE0 and
$FFE1.
•
Return of all enabled keyboard interrupt pins to logic 1 — As long
as any enabled keyboard interrupt pin is at logic 0, the keyboard
interrupt remains set.
The vector fetch or software clear and the return of all enabled keyboard
interrupt pins to logic 1 may occur in any order.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Technical Data
173
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
If the MODEK bit is clear, the keyboard interrupt pin is falling-edgesensitive only. With MODEK clear, a vector fetch or software clear
immediately clears the keyboard interrupt request.
Reset clears the keyboard interrupt request and the MODEK bit, clearing
the interrupt request even if a keyboard interrupt pin stays at logic 0.
The keyboard flag bit (KEYF) in the keyboard status and control register
can be used to see if a pending interrupt exists. The KEYF bit is not
affected by the keyboard interrupt mask bit (IMASKK) which makes it
useful in applications where polling is preferred.
To determine the logic level on a keyboard interrupt pin, disable the pullup device, use the data direction register to configure the pin as an input
and then read the data register.
NOTE:
Setting a keyboard interrupt enable bit (KBIEx) forces the corresponding
keyboard interrupt pin to be an input, overriding the data direction
register. However, the data direction register bit must be a logic 0 for
software to read the pin.
14.4.1 Keyboard Initialization
When a keyboard interrupt pin is enabled, it takes time for the internal
pull-up to reach a logic 1. Therefore a false interrupt can occur as soon
as the pin is enabled.
To prevent a false interrupt on keyboard initialization:
1. Mask keyboard interrupts by setting the IMASKK bit in the
keyboard status and control register.
2. Enable the KBI pins by setting the appropriate KBIEx bits in the
keyboard interrupt enable register.
3. Write to the ACKK bit in the keyboard status and control register
to clear any false interrupts.
4. Clear the IMASKK bit.
An interrupt signal on an edge-triggered pin can be acknowledged
immediately after enabling the pin. An interrupt signal on an edge- and
Technical Data
174
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
MOTOROLA
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Functional Description
level-triggered interrupt pin must be acknowledged after a delay that
depends on the external load.
Another way to avoid a false interrupt:
1. Configure the keyboard pins as outputs by setting the appropriate
DDRA bits in the data direction register A.
2. Write logic 1s to the appropriate port A data register bits.
3. Enable the KBI pins by setting the appropriate KBIEx bits in the
keyboard interrupt enable register.
14.4.2 Keyboard Status and Control Register
•
Flags keyboard interrupt requests
•
Acknowledges keyboard interrupt requests
•
Masks keyboard interrupt requests
•
Controls keyboard interrupt triggering sensitivity
Address:
Read:
$001A
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
KEYF
0
Write:
Reset:
1
Bit 0
IMASKK
MODEK
0
0
ACKK
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-3. Keyboard Status and Control Register (KBSCR)
Bits 7–4 — Not used
These read-only bits always read as logic 0’s.
KEYF — Keyboard Flag Bit
This read-only bit is set when a keyboard interrupt is pending on portA. Reset clears the KEYF bit.
1 = Keyboard interrupt pending
0 = No keyboard interrupt pending
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Technical Data
175
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
ACKK — Keyboard Acknowledge Bit
Writing a logic 1 to this write-only bit clears the keyboard interrupt
request on port-A. ACKK always reads as logic 0. Reset clears ACKK.
IMASKK— Keyboard Interrupt Mask Bit
Writing a logic 1 to this read/write bit prevents the output of the
keyboard interrupt mask from generating interrupt requests on port-A.
Reset clears the IMASKK bit.
1 = Keyboard interrupt requests masked
0 = Keyboard interrupt requests not masked
MODEK — Keyboard Triggering Sensitivity Bit
This read/write bit controls the triggering sensitivity of the keyboard
interrupt pins on port-A. Reset clears MODEK.
1 = Keyboard interrupt requests on falling edges and low levels
0 = Keyboard interrupt requests on falling edges only
14.4.3 Keyboard Interrupt Enable Register
The port-A keyboard interrupt enable register enables or disables each
port-A pin to operate as a keyboard interrupt pin.
Address:
$001B
Bit 7
Read:
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
KBIE6
KBIE5
KBIE4
KBIE3
KBIE2
KBIE1
KBIE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Write:
Reset:
0
Figure 14-4. Keyboard Interrupt Enable Register (KBIER)
KBIE6–KBIE0 — Port-A Keyboard Interrupt Enable Bits
Each of these read/write bits enables the corresponding keyboard
interrupt pin on port-A to latch interrupt requests. Reset clears the
keyboard interrupt enable register.
1 = KBIx pin enabled as keyboard interrupt pin
0 = KBIx pin not enabled as keyboard interrupt pin
Technical Data
176
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
MOTOROLA
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Low-Power Modes
14.5 Low-Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low powerconsumption standby modes.
14.5.1 Wait Mode
The keyboard modules remain active in wait mode. Clearing the
IMASKK bit in the keyboard status and control register enables keyboard
interrupt requests to bring the MCU out of wait mode.
14.5.2 Stop Mode
The keyboard module remains active in stop mode. Clearing the
IMASKK bit in the keyboard status and control register enables keyboard
interrupt requests to bring the MCU out of stop mode.
14.6 Keyboard Module During Break Interrupts
The system integration module (SIM) controls whether the keyboard
interrupt latch can be cleared during the break state. The BCFE bit in the
break flag control register (BFCR) enables software to clear status bits
during the break state.
To allow software to clear the keyboard interrupt latch during a break
interrupt, write a logic 1 to the BCFE bit. If a latch is cleared during the
break state, it remains cleared when the MCU exits the break state.
To protect the latch during the break state, write a logic 0 to the BCFE
bit. With BCFE at logic 0 (its default state), writing to the keyboard
acknowledge bit (ACKK) in the keyboard status and control register
during the break state has no effect.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Technical Data
177
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
Technical Data
178
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Keyboard Interrupt Module (KBI)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 15. Computer Operating Properly (COP)
15.1 Contents
15.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
15.3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
15.4 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.1 2OSCOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.2 COPCTL Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.3 Power-On Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.4 Internal Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15.4.5 Reset Vector Fetch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
15.4.6 COPD (COP Disable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
15.4.7 COPRS (COP Rate Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
15.5
COP Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.6
Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.7
Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.8 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
15.8.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.8.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
15.9
COP Module During Break Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
15.2 Introduction
The computer operating properly (COP) module contains a free-running
counter that generates a reset if allowed to overflow. The COP module
helps software recover from runaway code. Prevent a COP reset by
clearing the COP counter periodically. The COP module can be disabled
through the COPD bit in the CONFIG1 register.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
Technical Data
179
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
15.3 Functional Description
Figure 15-1 shows the structure of the COP module.
SIM
2OSCOUT
SIM RESET CIRCUIT
RESET VECTOR FETCH
RESET STATUS REGISTER
COP TIMEOUT
CLEAR ALL STAGES
INTERNAL RESET SOURCES(1)
CLEAR STAGES 5–12
12-BIT SIM COUNTER
COPCTL WRITE
COP CLOCK
COP MODULE
6-BIT COP COUNTER
COPEN (FROM SIM)
COPD (FROM CONFIG1)
RESET
COPCTL WRITE
CLEAR
COP COUNTER
COP RATE SEL
(COPRS FROM CONFIG1)
NOTE:
1. See SIM section for more details.
Figure 15-1. COP Block Diagram
The COP counter is a free-running 6-bit counter preceded by the 12-bit
system integration module (SIM) counter. If not cleared by software, the
COP counter overflows and generates an asynchronous reset after
218 – 24 or 213 – 24 2OSCOUT cycles; depending on the state of the
COP rate select bit, COPRS, in configuration register 1. With a 218 – 24
2OSCOUT cycle overflow option, a 8MHz crystal gives a COP timeout
period of 32.766 ms. Writing any value to location $FFFF before an
overflow occurs prevents a COP reset by clearing the COP counter and
stages 12 through 5 of the SIM counter.
Technical Data
180
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
MOTOROLA
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
I/O Signals
NOTE:
Service the COP immediately after reset and before entering or after
exiting stop mode to guarantee the maximum time before the first COP
counter overflow.
A COP reset pulls the RST pin low for 32 × 2OSCOUT cycles and sets
the COP bit in the reset status register (RSR). (See 7.8.2 Reset Status
Register (RSR).).
NOTE:
Place COP clearing instructions in the main program and not in an
interrupt subroutine. Such an interrupt subroutine could keep the COP
from generating a reset even while the main program is not working
properly.
15.4 I/O Signals
The following paragraphs describe the signals shown in Figure 15-1.
15.4.1 2OSCOUT
2OSCOUT is the oscillator output signal. 2OSCOUT frequency is equal
to the crystal frequency or the RC-oscillator frequency.
15.4.2 COPCTL Write
Writing any value to the COP control register (COPCTL) (see 15.5 COP
Control Register) clears the COP counter and clears bits 12 through 5
of the SIM counter. Reading the COP control register returns the low
byte of the reset vector.
15.4.3 Power-On Reset
The power-on reset (POR) circuit in the SIM clears the SIM counter
4096 × 2OSCOUT cycles after power-up.
15.4.4 Internal Reset
An internal reset clears the SIM counter and the COP counter.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
Technical Data
181
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
15.4.5 Reset Vector Fetch
A reset vector fetch occurs when the vector address appears on the data
bus. A reset vector fetch clears the SIM counter.
15.4.6 COPD (COP Disable)
The COPD signal reflects the state of the COP disable bit (COPD) in the
configuration register (CONFIG). (See Section 5. Configuration
Register (CONFIG).)
15.4.7 COPRS (COP Rate Select)
The COPRS signal reflects the state of the COP rate select bit (COPRS)
in the configuration register 1.
Address:
$001F
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
COPRS
R
R
LVID
R
SSREC
STOP
COPD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
R
= Reserved
Figure 15-2. Configuration Register 1 (CONFIG1)
COPRS — COP Rate Select Bit
COPRS selects the COP timeout period. Reset clears COPRS.
1 = COP timeout period is (213 – 24) × 2OSCOUT cycles
0 = COP timeout period is (218 – 24) × 2OSCOUT cycles
COPD — COP Disable Bit
COPD disables the COP module.
1 = COP module disabled
0 = COP module enabled
Technical Data
182
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
MOTOROLA
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
COP Control Register
15.5 COP Control Register
The COP control register is located at address $FFFF and overlaps the
reset vector. Writing any value to $FFFF clears the COP counter and
starts a new timeout period. Reading location $FFFF returns the low
byte of the reset vector.
Address:
$FFFF
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
Read:
Low byte of reset vector
Write:
Clear COP counter
Reset:
Unaffected by reset
2
1
Bit 0
Figure 15-3. COP Control Register (COPCTL)
15.6 Interrupts
The COP does not generate CPU interrupt requests.
15.7 Monitor Mode
The COP is disabled in monitor mode when VDD + VHI is present on the
IRQ1 pin or on the RST pin.
15.8 Low-Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low-power
consumption standby modes.
15.8.1 Wait Mode
The COP continues to operate during wait mode. To prevent a COP
reset during wait mode, periodically clear the COP counter in a CPU
interrupt routine.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
Technical Data
183
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
15.8.2 Stop Mode
Stop mode turns off the 2OSCOUT input to the COP and clears the SIM
counter. Service the COP immediately before entering or after exiting
stop mode to ensure a full COP timeout period after entering or exiting
stop mode.
15.9 COP Module During Break Mode
The COP is disabled during a break interrupt when VDD + VHI is present
on the RST pin.
Technical Data
184
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 16. Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
16.1 Contents
16.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.4
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16.5
LVI Control Register (CONFIG2/CONFIG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
16.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.2 Introduction
This section describes the low-voltage inhibit module (LVI), which
monitors the voltage on the VDD pin and generates a reset when the VDD
voltage falls to the LVI trip (LVITRIP) voltage.
16.3 Features
Features of the LVI module include the following:
•
Selectable LVI trip voltage
•
Selectable LVI circuit disable
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
185
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
16.4 Functional Description
Figure 16-1 shows the structure of the LVI module. The LVI is enabled
after a reset. The LVI module contains a bandgap reference circuit and
comparator. Setting LVI disable bit (LVID) disables the LVI to monitor
VDD voltage. The LVI trip voltage selection bits (LVIT1, LVIT0) determine
at which VDD level the LVI module should take actions.
The LVI module generates one output signal:
LVI Reset — an reset signal will be generated to reset the CPU when
VDD drops to below the set trip point.
VDD
LVID
VDD > LVITRIP = 0
LVI RESET
VDD < LVITRIP = 1
LOW VDD
DETECTOR
LVIT1
LVIT0
Figure 16-1. LVI Module Block Diagram
16.5 LVI Control Register (CONFIG2/CONFIG1)
Address:
$001E
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
IRQPUD
R
R
LVIT1
LVIT0
R
R
R
Reset:
0
0
0
Not affected
Not affected
0
0
0
POR:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
= Reserved
Read:
Write:
Figure 16-2. Configuration Register 2 (CONFIG2)
Technical Data
186
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
MOTOROLA
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
Low-Power Modes
Address:
$001F
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
COPRS
R
R
LVID
R
SSREC
STOP
COPD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
R
= Reserved
Figure 16-3. Configuration Register 1 (CONFIG1)
LVID — Low Voltage Inhibit Disable Bit
1 = Low voltage inhibit disabled
0 = Low voltage inhibit enabled
LVIT1, LVIT0 — LVI Trip Voltage Selection
These two bits determine at which level of VDD the LVI module will
come into action. LVIT1 and LVIT0 are cleared by a Power-On Reset
only.
LVIT1
LVIT0
Trip Voltage(1)
Comments
0
0
VLVR3 (2.4V)
For VDD =3V operation
0
1
VLVR3 (2.4V)
For VDD =3V operation
1
0
VLVR5 (4.0V)
For VDD =5V operation
1
1
Reserved
1. See Section 18. Electrical Specifications for full parameters.
16.6 Low-Power Modes
The STOP and WAIT instructions put the MCU in low-powerconsumption standby modes.
16.6.1 Wait Mode
The LVI module, when enabled, will continue to operate in WAIT Mode.
16.6.2 Stop Mode
The LVI module, when enabled, will continue to operate in STOP Mode.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
187
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
Technical Data
188
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Low Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 17. Break Module (BREAK)
17.1 Contents
17.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
17.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
17.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
17.4.1 Flag Protection During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
17.4.2 CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
17.4.3 TIM During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
17.4.4 COP During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
17.5 Break Module Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
17.5.1 Break Status and Control Register (BRKSCR) . . . . . . . . . 193
17.5.2 Break Address Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
17.5.3 Break Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
17.5.4 Break Flag Control Register (BFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
17.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
17.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
17.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
17.2 Introduction
This section describes the break module. The break module can
generate a break interrupt that stops normal program flow at a defined
address to enter a background program.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Break Module (BREAK)
189
Break Module (BREAK)
17.3 Features
Features of the break module include the following:
•
Accessible I/O registers during the break Interrupt
•
CPU-generated break interrupts
•
Software-generated break interrupts
•
COP disabling during break interrupts
17.4 Functional Description
When the internal address bus matches the value written in the break
address registers, the break module issues a breakpoint signal (BKPT)
to the SIM. The SIM then causes the CPU to load the instruction register
with a software interrupt instruction (SWI) after completion of the current
CPU instruction. The program counter vectors to $FFFC and $FFFD
($FEFC and $FEFD in monitor mode).
The following events can cause a break interrupt to occur:
•
A CPU-generated address (the address in the program counter)
matches the contents of the break address registers.
•
Software writes a logic one to the BRKA bit in the break status and
control register.
When a CPU generated address matches the contents of the break
address registers, the break interrupt begins after the CPU completes its
current instruction. A return from interrupt instruction (RTI) in the break
routine ends the break interrupt and returns the MCU to normal
operation. Figure 17-1 shows the structure of the break module.
Technical Data
190
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Break Module (BREAK)
MOTOROLA
Break Module (BREAK)
Functional Description
IAB[15:8]
BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER HIGH
8-BIT COMPARATOR
IAB[15:0]
BKPT
(TO SIM)
CONTROL
8-BIT COMPARATOR
BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER LOW
IAB[7:0]
Figure 17-1. Break Module Block Diagram
Addr.
$FE00
Register Name
Read:
Break Status Register
Write:
(BSR)
Reset:
Read:
Break Flag Control
Register Write:
(BFCR)
Reset:
$FE03
$FE0C
Read:
Break Address High
Register Write:
(BRKH)
Reset:
$FE0D
Read:
Break Address low
Register Write:
(BRKL)
Reset:
Read:
Break Status and Control
$FE0E
Register Write:
(BRKSCR)
Reset:
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
R
R
R
R
R
R
1
SBSW
See note
Bit 0
R
0
BCFE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BRKE
BRKA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
R
0
Note: Writing a logic 0 clears SBSW.
= Reserved
Figure 17-2. Break I/O Register Summary
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Break Module (BREAK)
191
Break Module (BREAK)
17.4.1 Flag Protection During Break Interrupts
The system integration module (SIM) controls whether or not module
status bits can be cleared during the break state. The BCFE bit in the
break flag control register (BFCR) enables software to clear status bits
during the break state. (See 7.8.3 Break Flag Control Register (BFCR)
and see the Break Interrupts subsection for each module.)
17.4.2 CPU During Break Interrupts
The CPU starts a break interrupt by:
•
Loading the instruction register with the SWI instruction
•
Loading the program counter with $FFFC:$FFFD
($FEFC:$FEFD in monitor mode)
The break interrupt begins after completion of the CPU instruction in
progress. If the break address register match occurs on the last cycle of
a CPU instruction, the break interrupt begins immediately.
17.4.3 TIM During Break Interrupts
A break interrupt stops the timer counter.
17.4.4 COP During Break Interrupts
The COP is disabled during a break interrupt when VDD + VHI is present
on the RST pin.
17.5 Break Module Registers
These registers control and monitor operation of the break module:
•
Break status and control register (BRKSCR)
•
Break address register high (BRKH)
•
Break address register low (BRKL)
•
Break status register (BSR)
•
Break flag control register (BFCR)
Technical Data
192
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Break Module (BREAK)
MOTOROLA
Break Module (BREAK)
Break Module Registers
17.5.1 Break Status and Control Register (BRKSCR)
The break status and control register contains break module enable and
status bits.
Address:
$FE0E
Bit 7
6
BRKE
BRKA
0
0
Read:
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Write:
Reset:
= Unimplemented
Figure 17-3. Break Status and Control Register (BRKSCR)
BRKE — Break Enable Bit
This read/write bit enables breaks on break address register matches.
Clear BRKE by writing a logic zero to bit 7. Reset clears the BRKE bit.
1 = Breaks enabled on 16-bit address match
0 = Breaks disabled
BRKA — Break Active Bit
This read/write status and control bit is set when a break address
match occurs. Writing a logic one to BRKA generates a break
interrupt. Clear BRKA by writing a logic zero to it before exiting the
break routine. Reset clears the BRKA bit.
1 = Break address match
0 = No break address match
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Break Module (BREAK)
193
Break Module (BREAK)
17.5.2 Break Address Registers
The break address registers contain the high and low bytes of the
desired breakpoint address. Reset clears the break address registers.
Address:
$FE0C
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit 8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Figure 17-4. Break Address Register High (BRKH)
Address:
$FE0D
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read:
Write:
Reset:
Figure 17-5. Break Address Register Low (BRKL)
17.5.3 Break Status Register
The break status register contains a flag to indicate that a break caused
an exit from stop or wait mode.
Address:
$FE00
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
R
R
R
R
R
R
Read:
1
Bit 0
SBSW
Write:
Note(1)
Reset:
0
R
= Reserved
R
1. Writing a logic zero clears SBSW.
Figure 17-6. Break Status Register (BSR)
Technical Data
194
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Break Module (BREAK)
MOTOROLA
Break Module (BREAK)
Break Module Registers
SBSW — SIM Break Stop/Wait
This status bit is useful in applications requiring a return to wait or stop
mode after exiting from a break interrupt. Clear SBSW by writing a
logic zero to it. Reset clears SBSW.
1 = Stop mode or wait mode was exited by break interrupt
0 = Stop mode or wait mode was not exited by break interrupt
SBSW can be read within the break state SWI routine. The user can
modify the return address on the stack by subtracting one from it. The
following code is an example of this.
; This code works if the H register has been pushed onto the stack in the break
; service routine software. This code should be executed at the end of the
; break service routine software.
HIBYTE
EQU
5
LOBYTE
EQU
6
;
If not SBSW, do RTI
BRCLR
SBSW,BSR, RETURN
; See if wait mode or stop mode was exited
; by break.
TST
LOBYTE,SP
; If RETURNLO is not zero,
BNE
DOLO
; then just decrement low byte.
DEC
HIBYTE,SP
; Else deal with high byte, too.
DOLO
DEC
LOBYTE,SP
; Point to WAIT/STOP opcode.
RETURN
PULH
RTI
; Restore H register.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Break Module (BREAK)
195
Break Module (BREAK)
17.5.4 Break Flag Control Register (BFCR)
The break control register contains a bit that enables software to clear
status bits while the MCU is in a break state.
Address:
$FE03
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
BCFE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Read:
Write:
Reset:
0
R
= Reserved
Figure 17-7. Break Flag Control Register (BFCR)
BCFE — Break Clear Flag Enable Bit
This read/write bit enables software to clear status bits by accessing
status registers while the MCU is in a break state. To clear status bits
during the break state, the BCFE bit must be set.
1 = Status bits clearable during break
0 = Status bits not clearable during break
17.6 Low-Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low-powerconsumption standby modes.
17.6.1 Wait Mode
If enabled, the break module is active in wait mode. In the break routine,
the user can subtract one from the return address on the stack if SBSW
is set (see 7.7 Low-Power Modes). Clear the SBSW bit by writing logic
zero to it.
17.6.2 Stop Mode
A break interrupt causes exit from stop mode and sets the SBSW bit in
the break status register. See 7.8 SIM Registers.
Technical Data
196
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Break Module (BREAK)
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 18. Electrical Specifications
18.1 Contents
18.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
18.3
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
18.4
Functional Operating Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
18.5
Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
18.6
5V DC Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
18.7
5V Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
18.8
5V Oscillator Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
18.9
3V DC Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
18.10 3V Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
18.11 3V Oscillator Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
18.12 Typical Supply Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
18.13 ADC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
18.14 Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
18.2 Introduction
This section contains electrical and timing specifications.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Electrical Specifications
197
Electrical Specifications
18.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Maximum ratings are the extreme limits to which the MCU can be
exposed without permanently damaging it.
NOTE:
This device is not guaranteed to operate properly at the maximum
ratings. Refer to Sections 18.6 and 18.9 for guaranteed operating
conditions.
Table 18-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Value
Unit
Supply voltage
VDD
–0.3 to +6.0
V
Input voltage
VIN
VSS –0.3 to VDD +0.3
V
VDD +VHI
VSS –0.3 to +8.5
V
I
± 25
mA
Storage temperature
TSTG
–55 to +150
°C
Maximum current out of VSS
IMVSS
100
mA
Maximum current into VDD
IMVDD
100
mA
Mode entry voltage, IRQ1 pin
Maximum current per pin
excluding VDD and VSS
NOTES:
1. Voltages referenced to VSS.
NOTE:
This device contains circuitry to protect the inputs against damage due
to high static voltages or electric fields; however, it is advised that normal
precautions be taken to avoid application of any voltage higher than
maximum-rated voltages to this high-impedance circuit. For proper
operation, it is recommended that VIN and VOUT be constrained to the
range VSS ≤ (VIN or VOUT) ≤ VDD. Reliability of operation is enhanced if
unused inputs are connected to an appropriate logic voltage level (for
example, either VSS or VDD.)
Technical Data
198
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Electrical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications
Functional Operating Range
18.4 Functional Operating Range
Table 18-2. Operating Range
Characteristic
Operating temperature range
Operating voltage range
Symbol
Value
Unit
TA
– 40 to +125
– 40 to +85
°C
VDD
5 ± 10%
3 ± 10%
V
18.5 Thermal Characteristics
Table 18-3. Thermal Characteristics
Characteristic
Symbol
Value
Unit
70
70
70
70
80
°C/W
°C/W
°C/W
°C/W
°C/W
Thermal resistance
20-pin PDIP
20-pin SOIC
28-pin PDIP
28-pin SOIC
48-pin LQFP
θJA
I/O pin power dissipation
PI/O
User determined
W
Power dissipation(1)
PD
PD = (IDD × VDD) + PI/O =
K/(TJ + 273 °C)
W
Constant(2)
K
Average junction temperature
TJ
PD x (TA + 273 °C)
+ PD2 × θJA
TA + (PD × θJA)
W/°C
°C
NOTES:
1. Power dissipation is a function of temperature.
2. K constant unique to the device. K can be determined for a known TA and measured PD.
With this value of K, PD and TJ can be determined for any value of TA.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Electrical Specifications
199
Electrical Specifications
18.6 5V DC Electrical Characteristics
Table 18-4. DC Electrical Characteristics (5V)
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Unit
Output high voltage (ILOAD = –2.0mA)
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7
VOH
VDD –0.8
—
—
V
Output low voltage (ILOAD = 1.6mA)
PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0, PTD1, PTD4, PTD5
VOL
—
—
0.4
V
Output low voltage (ILOAD = 25mA)
PTD6, PTD7
VOL
—
—
0.5
V
LED drives (VOL = 3V)
PTA0–PTA5, PTD2, PTD3, PTD6, PTD7
IOL
10
16
22
mA
Input high voltage
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7,
RST, IRQ1, OSC1
VIH
0.7 × VDD
—
VDD
V
Input low voltage
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7,
RST, IRQ1, OSC1
VIL
VSS
—
0.3 × VDD
V
—
—
10
4.5
11
5
mA
mA
—
—
6
1
6.5
1.5
mA
mA
—
—
2
2
5
5
µA
µA
—
—
2
2
10
10
µA
µA
VDD supply current, fOP = 4MHz
Run(3)
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Wait(4)
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Stop(5)
(–40°C to 85°C)
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
(–40°C to 125°C)
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
IDD
Digital I/O ports Hi-Z leakage current
IIL
—
—
± 10
µA
Input current
IIN
—
—
±1
µA
Capacitance
Ports (as input or output)
COUT
CIN
—
—
—
—
12
8
pF
POR rearm voltage(6)
VPOR
0
—
100
mV
POR rise time ramp rate(7)
RPOR
0.035
—
—
V/ms
Monitor mode entry voltage
VDD +VHI
1.5 × VDD
—
8.5
V
Technical Data
200
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Electrical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications
5V Control Timing
Table 18-4. DC Electrical Characteristics (5V)
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Unit
Pullup resistors(8)
PTD6, PTD7
RST, IRQ1, PTA0–PTA6
RPU1
RPU2
1.8
16
3.3
26
4.8
36
kΩ
kΩ
LVI reset voltage
VLVR5
3.6
4.0
4.4
V
NOTES:
1. VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted.
2. Typical values reflect average measurements at midpoint of voltage range, 25 °C only.
3. Run (operating) IDD measured using external square wave clock source (fOP = 4MHz). All inputs 0.2V from rail. No dc
loads. Less than 100 pF on all outputs. CL = 20 pF on OSC2. All ports configured as inputs. OSC2 capacitance linearly
affects run IDD. Measured with all modules enabled.
4. Wait IDD measured using external square wave clock source (fOP = 4MHz). All inputs 0.2V from rail. No dc loads. Less
than 100 pF on all outputs. CL = 20 pF on OSC2. All ports configured as inputs. OSC2 capacitance linearly affects
wait IDD.
5. Stop IDD measured with OSC1 grounded; no port pins sourcing current. LVI is disabled.
6. Maximum is highest voltage that POR is guaranteed.
7. If minimum VDD is not reached before the internal POR reset is released, RST must be driven low externally until
minimum VDD is reached.
8. RPU1 and RPU2 are measured at VDD = 5.0V.
18.7 5V Control Timing
Table 18-5. Control Timing (5V)
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Internal operating frequency(2)
fOP
—
8
MHz
RST input pulse width low(3)
tIRL
750
—
ns
NOTES:
1. VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH; timing shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VSS, unless otherwise
noted.
2. Some modules may require a minimum frequency greater than dc for proper operation; see appropriate table for this
information.
3. Minimum pulse width reset is guaranteed to be recognized. It is possible for a smaller pulse width to cause a reset.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Electrical Specifications
201
Electrical Specifications
18.8 5V Oscillator Characteristics
Table 18-6. Oscillator Component Specifications (5V)
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
fOSCXCLK
—
10
32
MHz
fRCCLK
2
10
12
MHz
fOSCXCLK
dc
—
32
MHz
Crystal load capacitance(2)
CL
—
—
—
Crystal fixed capacitance(2)
C1
—
2 × CL
—
Crystal tuning capacitance(2)
C2
—
2 × CL
—
Feedback bias resistor
RB
—
10 MΩ
—
Series resistor(2), (3)
RS
—
—
—
Crystal frequency, XTALCLK
RC oscillator frequency, RCCLK
External clock
reference frequency(1)
RC oscillator external R
REXT
RC oscillator external C
CEXT
See Figure 18-1
—
10
—
pF
NOTES:
1. No more than 10% duty cycle deviation from 50%.
2. Consult crystal vendor data sheet.
3. Not required for high frequency crystals.
RC frequency, fRCCLK (MHz)
14
12
CEXT = 10 pF
10
MCU
5V @ 25 °C
OSC1
8
6
VDD
4
REXT
CEXT
2
0
0
10
20
30
Resistor, REXT (kΩ)
40
50
Figure 18-1. RC vs. Frequency (5V @25°C)
Technical Data
202
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Electrical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications
3V DC Electrical Characteristics
18.9 3V DC Electrical Characteristics
Table 18-7. DC Electrical Characteristics (3V)
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Unit
Output high voltage (ILOAD = –1.0mA)
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7
VOH
VDD – 0.4
—
—
V
Output low voltage (ILOAD = 0.8mA)
PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0, PTD1, PTD4, PTD5
VOL
—
—
0.4
V
Output low voltage (ILOAD = 20mA)
PTD6, PTD7
VOL
—
—
0.5
V
LED drives (VOL = 1.8V)
PTA0–PTA5, PTD2, PTD3, PTD6, PTD7
IOL
3
6
10
mA
Input high voltage
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7,
RST, IRQ1, OSC1
VIH
0.7 × VDD
—
VDD
V
Input low voltage
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7,
RST, IRQ1, OSC1
VIL
VSS
—
0.3 × VDD
V
—
—
3
1.5
3.5
2
mA
mA
—
—
1.5
0.2
2
0.3
mA
mA
—
—
1
1
5
5
µA
µA
VDD supply current, fOP = 2MHz
Run(3)
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Wait(4)
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Stop(5)
(–40°C to 85°C)
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
IDD
Digital I/O ports Hi-Z leakage current
IIL
—
—
± 10
µA
Input current
IIN
—
—
±1
µA
Capacitance
Ports (as input or output)
COUT
CIN
—
—
—
—
12
8
pF
POR rearm voltage(6)
VPOR
0
—
100
mV
POR rise time ramp rate(7)
RPOR
0.035
—
—
V/ms
Monitor mode entry voltage
VDD +VHI
1.5 × VDD
—
8.5
V
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Electrical Specifications
203
Electrical Specifications
Table 18-7. DC Electrical Characteristics (3V)
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Unit
Pullup resistors(8)
PTD6, PTD7
RST, IRQ1, PTA0–PTA6
RPU1
RPU2
1.8
16
3.3
26
4.8
36
kΩ
kΩ
LVI reset voltage
VLVR3
2.0
2.4
2.69
V
NOTES:
1. VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted.
2. Typical values reflect average measurements at midpoint of voltage range, 25 °C only.
3. Run (operating) IDD measured using external square wave clock source (fOP = 2MHz). All inputs 0.2V from rail. No dc
loads. Less than 100 pF on all outputs. CL = 20 pF on OSC2. All ports configured as inputs. OSC2 capacitance linearly
affects run IDD. Measured with all modules enabled.
4. Wait IDD measured using external square wave clock source (fOP = 2MHz). All inputs 0.2V from rail. No dc loads. Less
than 100 pF on all outputs. CL = 20 pF on OSC2. All ports configured as inputs. OSC2 capacitance linearly affects
wait IDD.
5. Stop IDD measured with OSC1 grounded; no port pins sourcing current. LVI is disabled.
6. Maximum is highest voltage that POR is guaranteed.
7. If minimum VDD is not reached before the internal POR reset is released, RST must be driven low externally until
minimum VDD is reached.
8. RPU1 and RPU2 are measured at VDD = 5.0V.
18.10 3V Control Timing
Table 18-8. Control Timing (3V)
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Internal operating frequency(2)
fOP
—
4
MHz
RST input pulse width low(3)
tIRL
1.5
—
µs
NOTES:
1. VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH; timing shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise
noted.
2. Some modules may require a minimum frequency greater than dc for proper operation; see appropriate table for this information.
3. Minimum pulse width reset is guaranteed to be recognized. It is possible for a smaller pulse width to cause a reset.
Technical Data
204
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Electrical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications
3V Oscillator Characteristics
18.11 3V Oscillator Characteristics
Table 18-9. Oscillator Component Specifications (3V)
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
fOSCXCLK
—
8
16
MHz
fRCCLK
2
8
12
MHz
fOSCXCLK
dc
—
16
MHz
Crystal load capacitance(2)
CL
—
—
—
Crystal fixed capacitance(2)
C1
—
2 × CL
—
Crystal tuning capacitance(2)
C2
—
2 × CL
—
Feedback bias resistor
RB
—
10 MΩ
—
Series resistor(2), (3)
RS
—
—
—
Crystal frequency, XTALCLK
RC oscillator frequency, RCCLK
External clock
reference frequency(1)
RC oscillator external R
REXT
RC oscillator external C
CEXT
See Figure 18-2
—
10
—
pF
NOTES:
1. No more than 10% duty cycle deviation from 50%.
2. Consult crystal vendor data sheet.
3. Not required for high frequency crystals.
RC frequency, fRCCLK (MHz)
14
12
CEXT = 10 pF
10
MCU
3V @ 25 °C
OSC1
8
6
VDD
REXT
4
CEXT
2
0
0
10
20
30
Resistor, REXT (kΩ)
40
50
Figure 18-2. RC vs. Frequency (3V @25°C)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Electrical Specifications
205
Electrical Specifications
18.12 Typical Supply Currents
14
12
IDD (mA)
10
8
6
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
4
5.5 V
3.3 V
2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
fOP or fBUS (MHz)
7
8
9
Figure 18-3. Typical Operating IDD (MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned On (25 °C)
10
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
IDD (mA)
8
5.5 V
3.3 V
6
4
2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
fOP or fBUS (MHz)
7
8
9
Figure 18-4. Typical Operating IDD (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned On (25 °C)
Technical Data
206
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Electrical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications
Typical Supply Currents
10
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
8
5.5 V
3.3 V
IDD (mA)
6
4
2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
fOP or fBUS (MHz)
7
8
9
Figure 18-5. Typical Wait Mode IDD (MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned Off (25 °C)
2
1.75
MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
IDD (mA)
1.50
5.5 V
3.3 V
1.25
1
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
fOP or fBUS (MHz)
6
7
8
Figure 18-6. Typical Wait Mode IDD (MC68HRC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E),
with All Modules Turned Off (25 °C)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Electrical Specifications
207
Electrical Specifications
18.13 ADC Characteristics
Table 18-10. ADC Characteristics
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Supply voltage
VDDAD
2.7
(VDD min)
5.5
(VDD max)
V
Input voltages
VADIN
VSS
VDD
V
Resolution
BAD
8
8
Bits
Absolute accuracy
AAD
± 0.5
± 1.5
LSB
Includes quantization
ADC internal clock
fADIC
0.5
1.048
MHz
tAIC = 1/fADIC, tested
only at 1 MHz
Conversion range
RAD
VSS
VDD
V
Power-up time
tADPU
16
Conversion time
tADC
14
15
tAIC cycles
Sample time(1)
tADS
5
—
tAIC cycles
Zero input reading(2)
ZADI
00
01
Hex
VIN = VSS
Full-scale reading(3)
FADI
FE
FF
Hex
VIN = VDD
Input capacitance
CADI
—
(20) 8
pF
Not tested
—
—
±1
µA
Input leakage(3)
Port B/port D
Comments
tAIC cycles
NOTES:
1. Source impedances greater than 10 kΩ adversely affect internal RC charging time during input sampling.
2. Zero-input/full-scale reading requires sufficient decoupling measures for accurate conversions.
3. The external system error caused by input leakage current is approximately equal to the product of R source and input
current.
Technical Data
208
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Electrical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications
Memory Characteristics
18.14 Memory Characteristics
Table 18-11. Memory Characteristics
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
VRDR
1.3
—
V
—
1
—
MHz
FLASH read bus clock frequency
fRead(1)
32k
8M
Hz
FLASH page erase time
tErase(2)
1
—
ms
FLASH mass erase time
tMErase(3)
4
—
ms
FLASH PGM/ERASE to HVEN set up time
tnvs
10
—
µs
FLASH high-voltage hold time
tnvh
5
—
µs
FLASH high-voltage hold time (mass erase)
tnvh1
100
—
µs
FLASH program hold time
tpgs
5
—
µs
FLASH program time
tPROG
30
40
µs
FLASH return to read time
trcv(4)
1
—
µs
FLASH cumulative program hv period
tHV(5)
—
4
ms
—
10k
—
cycles
FLASH row program endurance
—
10k
—
cycles
FLASH data retention time(8)
—
10
—
years
RAM data retention voltage
FLASH program bus clock frequency
FLASH row erase endurance(6)
(7)
NOTES:
1. fRead is defined as the frequency range for which the FLASH memory can be read.
2. If the page erase time is longer than tErase (Min), there is no erase-disturb, but it reduces the endurance of the
FLASH memory.
3. If the mass erase time is longer than tMErase (Min), there is no erase-disturb, but it reduces the endurance of
the FLASH memory.
4. trcv is defined as the time it needs before the FLASH can be read after turning off the high voltage charge pump,
by clearing HVEN to logic 0.
5. tHV is defined as the cumulative high voltage programming time to the same row before next erase.
tHV must satisfy this condition: tnvs + tnvh + tpgs + (tPROG × 32) ≤ tHV max.
6. The minimum row endurance value specifies each row of the FLASH memory is guaranteed to work for at least
this many erase / program cycles.
7. The minimum row endurance value specifies each row of the FLASH memory is guaranteed to work for at least
this many erase / program cycles.
8. The FLASH is guaranteed to retain data over the entire operating temperature range for at least the minimum
time specified.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Electrical Specifications
209
Electrical Specifications
Technical Data
210
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Electrical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 19. Mechanical Specifications
19.1 Contents
19.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
19.3
20-Pin PDIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
19.4
20-Pin SOIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
19.5
28-Pin PDIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
19.6
28-Pin SOIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
19.7
48-Pin LQFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
19.2 Introduction
This section gives the dimensions for:
•
20-pin plastic dual in-line package (case #738)
•
20-pin small outline integrated circuit package (case #751D)
•
28-pin plastic dual in-line package (case #710)
•
28-pin small outline integrated circuit package (case #751F)
•
48-pin low-profile quad flat pack (case #932)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Mechanical Specifications
Technical Data
211
Mechanical Specifications
19.3 20-Pin PDIP
–A–
20
11
1
10
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI
Y14.5M, 1982.
2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: INCH.
3. DIMENSION L TO CENTER OF LEAD WHEN
FORMED PARALLEL.
4. DIMENSION B DOES NOT INCLUDE MOLD
FLASH.
B
L
C
–T–
DIM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
K
L
M
N
K
SEATING
PLANE
M
N
E
G
F
J
D
20 PL
0.25 (0.010)
20 PL
0.25 (0.010)
M
T A
M
T B
M
M
INCHES
MIN
MAX
1.010
1.070
0.240
0.260
0.150
0.180
0.015
0.022
0.050 BSC
0.050
0.070
0.100 BSC
0.008
0.015
0.110
0.140
0.300 BSC
0_
15 _
0.020
0.040
MILLIMETERS
MIN
MAX
25.66
27.17
6.10
6.60
3.81
4.57
0.39
0.55
1.27 BSC
1.27
1.77
2.54 BSC
0.21
0.38
2.80
3.55
7.62 BSC
0_
15_
0.51
1.01
Figure 19-1. 20-Pin PDIP (Case #738)
19.4 20-Pin SOIC
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER
ANSI Y14.5M, 1982.
2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: MILLIMETER.
3. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE
MOLD PROTRUSION.
4. MAXIMUM MOLD PROTRUSION 0.150
(0.006) PER SIDE.
5. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE
DAMBAR PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE
DAMBAR PROTRUSION SHALL BE 0.13
(0.005) TOTAL IN EXCESS OF D DIMENSION
AT MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION.
–A–
20
11
–B–
10X
P
0.010 (0.25)
1
M
B
M
10
20X
D
0.010 (0.25)
M
T A
B
S
J
S
F
R X 45 _
C
–T–
18X
G
K
SEATING
PLANE
DIM
A
B
C
D
F
G
J
K
M
P
R
MILLIMETERS
MIN
MAX
12.65
12.95
7.40
7.60
2.35
2.65
0.35
0.49
0.50
0.90
1.27 BSC
0.25
0.32
0.10
0.25
0_
7_
10.05
10.55
0.25
0.75
INCHES
MIN
MAX
0.499
0.510
0.292
0.299
0.093
0.104
0.014
0.019
0.020
0.035
0.050 BSC
0.010
0.012
0.004
0.009
0_
7_
0.395
0.415
0.010
0.029
M
Figure 19-2. 20-Pin SOIC (Case #751D)
Technical Data
212
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Mechanical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Mechanical Specifications
28-Pin PDIP
19.5 28-Pin PDIP
28
NOTES:
1. POSITIONAL TOLERANCE OF LEADS (D), SHALL
BE WITHIN 0.25 (0.010) AT MAXIMUM MATERIAL
CONDITION, IN RELATION TO SEATING PLANE
AND EACH OTHER.
2. DIMENSION L TO CENTER OF LEADS WHEN
FORMED PARALLEL.
3. DIMENSION B DOES NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH.
15
B
DIM
A
B
C
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
14
1
L
C
A
N
H
G
F
M
K
D
J
SEATING
PLANE
MILLIMETERS
MIN
MAX
36.45
37.21
13.72
14.22
3.94
5.08
0.36
0.56
1.02
1.52
2.54 BSC
1.65
2.16
0.20
0.38
2.92
3.43
15.24 BSC
0°
15°
0.51
1.02
INCHES
MIN
MAX
1.435
1.465
0.540
0.560
0.155
0.200
0.014
0.022
0.040
0.060
0.100 BSC
0.065
0.085
0.008
0.015
0.115
0.135
0.600 BSC
0°
15°
0.020
0.040
Figure 19-3. 28-Pin PDIP (Case #710)
19.6 28-Pin SOIC
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER
ANSI Y14.5M, 1982.
2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: MILLIMETER.
3. DIMENSION A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE
MOLD PROTRUSION.
4. MAXIMUM MOLD PROTRUSION 0.15 (0.006)
PER SIDE.
5. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR
PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE
DAMBAR PROTRUSION SHALL BE 0.13
(0.005) TOTAL IN EXCESS OF D DIMENSION
AT MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION.
-A15
28
14X
-B1
P
0.010 (0.25)
M
B
M
14
28X
D
0.010 (0.25)
M
T A
S
B
M
S
R
X 45
C
26X
-T-
G
SEATING
PLANE
K
F
J
DIM
A
B
C
D
F
G
J
K
M
P
R
MILLIMETERS
MIN
MAX
17.80
18.05
7.40
7.60
2.35
2.65
0.35
0.49
0.41
0.90
1.27 BSC
0.23
0.32
0.13
0.29
0°
8°
10.01
10.55
0.25
0.75
INCHES
MIN
MAX
0.701
0.711
0.292
0.299
0.093
0.104
0.014
0.019
0.016
0.035
0.050 BSC
0.009
0.013
0.005
0.011
0°
8°
0.395
0.415
0.010
0.029
Figure 19-4. 28-Pin SOIC (Case #751F)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Mechanical Specifications
Technical Data
213
Mechanical Specifications
19.7 48-Pin LQFP
4X
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ASME
Y14.5M, 1994.
2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: MILLIMETER.
3. DATUM PLANE AB IS LOCATED AT BOTTOM OF
LEAD AND IS COINCIDENT WITH THE LEAD
WHERE THE LEAD EXITS THE PLASTIC BODY AT
THE BOTTOM OF THE PARTING LINE.
4. DATUMS T, U, AND Z TO BE DETERMINED AT
DATUM PLANE AB.
5. DIMENSIONS S AND V TO BE DETERMINED AT
SEATING PLANE AC.
6. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD
PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE PROTRUSION IS
0.250 PER SIDE. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO
INCLUDE MOLD MISMATCH AND ARE
DETERMINED AT DATUM PLANE AB.
7. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR
PROTRUSION. DAMBAR PROTRUSION SHALL
NOT CAUSE THE D DIMENSION TO EXCEED
0.350.
8. MINIMUM SOLDER PLATE THICKNESS SHALL BE
0.0076.
9. EXACT SHAPE OF EACH CORNER IS OPTIONAL.
0.200 AB T–U Z
DETAIL Y
A
P
A1
48
37
1
36
T
U
B
V
AE
B1
12
25
13
AE
V1
24
DIM
A
A1
B
B1
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
S1
V
V1
W
AA
Z
S1
T, U, Z
S
DETAIL Y
4X
0.200 AC T–U Z
0.080 AC
G
AB
AD
AC
MILLIMETERS
MIN
MAX
7.000 BSC
3.500 BSC
7.000 BSC
3.500 BSC
1.400
1.600
0.170
0.270
1.350
1.450
0.170
0.230
0.500 BSC
0.050
0.150
0.090
0.200
0.500
0.700
1°
5°
12° REF
0.090
0.160
0.250 BSC
0.150
0.250
9.000 BSC
4.500 BSC
9.000 BSC
4.500 BSC
0.200 REF
1.000 REF
M°
BASE METAL
TOP & BOTTOM
J
0.250
N
R
C
E
GAUGE PLANE
9
F
D
0.080
M
AC T–U Z
SECTION AE–AE
W
H
L°
K
DETAIL AD
AA
Figure 19-5. 48-Pin LQFP (Case #932)
Technical Data
214
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Mechanical Specifications
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Section 20. Ordering Information
20.1 Contents
20.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
20.3
MC Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
20.2 Introduction
This section contains ordering numbers for the MC68H(R)C908JL3E,
MC68H(R)C908JK3E, and MC68H(R)C908JK1E.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
Technical Data
Ordering Information
215
Ordering Information
20.3 MC Order Numbers
Table 20-1. MC Order Numbers
MC order number
Oscillator type
MC68HC908JL3ECFA
MC68HC908JL3EMFA
Crystal oscillator
MC68HRC98JL3ECFA
MC68HRC98JL3EMFA
RC oscillator
MC68HC908JL3ECP
MC68HC908JL3EMP
MC68HC908JL3ECDW
MC68HC908JL3EMDW
Crystal oscillator
MC68HRC98JL3ECP
MC68HRC98JL3EMP
MC68HRC98JL3ECDW
MC68HRC98JL3EMDW
RC oscillator
MC68HC908JK3ECP
MC68HC908JK3EMP
MC68HC908JK3ECDW
MC68HC908JK3EMDW
Crystal oscillator
FLASH memory
Package
4096 Bytes
48-pin LQFP
4096 Bytes
28-pin package
4096 Bytes
MC68HRC98JK3ECP
MC68HRC98JK3EMP
MC68HRC98JK3ECDW
MC68HRC98JK3EMDW
RC oscillator
20-pin package
MC68HC908JK1ECP
MC68HC908JK1EMP
MC68HC908JK1ECDW
MC68HC908JK1EMDW
Crystal oscillator
1536 Bytes
MC68HRC98JK1ECP
MC68HRC98JK1EMP
MC68HRC98JK1ECDW
MC68HRC98JK1EMDW
RC oscillator
Notes:
C = –40 °C to +85 °C
M = –40 °C to +125 °C (available for VDD = 5V only)
P = Plastic dual in-line package (PDIP)
DW = Small outline integrated circuit package (SOIC)
FA = Low-Profile Quad Flat Pack (LQFP)
Technical Data
216
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
Ordering Information
MOTOROLA
Technical Data – MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Appendix A. MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.1 Contents
A.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
A.3
FLASH Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.4
Low-Voltage Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.5
Oscillator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.6
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.6.1
Functional Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
A.6.2
DC Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
A.6.3
Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
A.6.4
Oscillator Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
A.6.5
ADC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
A.6.6
Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
A.7
MC Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
A.2 Introduction
This appendix introduces three devices, that are low-voltage versions of
MC68HC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E:
•
MC68HLC908JL3E
•
MC68HLC908JK3E
•
MC68HLC908JK1E
The entire data book apply to these low-voltage devices, with exceptions
outlined in this appendix.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Technical Data
217
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.3 FLASH Memory
The FLASH memory can be read at minimum VDD of 2.2V.
Program or erase operations require a minimum VDD of 2.7V.
A.4 Low-Voltage Inhibit
There is no low-voltage inhibit circuit. Therefore, no low-voltage reset.
The associated register bits are reserved bits.
A.5 Oscillator Options
Only crystal oscillator or direct clock input is supported.
A.6 Electrical Specifications
Electrical specifications for low-voltage devices are given in the following
tables.
A.6.1 Functional Operating Range
Table A-1. Operating Range
Characteristic
Symbol
Value
Unit
TA
0 to +85
°C
Operating voltage range
VDD
2.2 to 5.5
V
Operating voltage for FLASH memory
program and erase operations
VDD
2.7 to 5.5
V
Operating temperature range
Technical Data
218
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MOTOROLA
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.6.2 DC Electrical Characteristics
Table A-2. DC Electrical Characteristics
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Typ(2)
Max
Unit
Output high voltage (ILOAD = –1.0mA)
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7
VOH
VDD – 0.4
—
—
V
Output low voltage (ILOAD = 0.8mA)
PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0, PTD1, PTD4, PTD5
VOL
—
—
0.4
V
Output low voltage (ILOAD = 15mA)
PTD6, PTD7
VOL
—
—
0.5
V
Input high voltage
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7,
RST, IRQ1, OSC1
VIH
0.7 × VDD
—
VDD
V
Input low voltage
PTA0–PTA6, PTB0–PTB7, PTD0–PTD7,
RST, IRQ1, OSC1
VIL
VSS
—
0.2 × VDD
V
VDD supply current (VDD = 2.4V, fOP = 2MHz)
Run(3)
Wait(4)
Stop(5) 0°C to 85°C
IDD
—
—
—
2
1
1
3.5
1.5
3
mA
mA
µA
Digital I/O ports Hi-Z leakage current
IIL
—
—
± 10
µA
Input current
IIN
—
—
±1
µA
Capacitance
Ports (as input or output)
COUT
CIN
—
—
—
—
12
8
pF
POR rearm voltage(6)
VPOR
0
—
100
mV
POR rise time ramp rate(7)
RPOR
0.02
—
—
V/ms
Pullup resistors(8)
PTD6, PTD7
RST, IRQ1, PTA0–PTA6
RPU1
RPU2
1.8
16
3.3
26
4.8
36
kΩ
kΩ
NOTES:
1. VDD = 2.4 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted.
2. Typical values reflect average measurements at midpoint of voltage range, 25 °C only.
3. Run (operating) IDD measured using external square wave clock source. All inputs 0.2 V from rail. No dc loads. Less
than 100 pF on all outputs. CL = 20 pF on OSC2. All ports configured as inputs. OSC2 capacitance linearly affects run
IDD. Measured with all modules enabled.
4. Wait IDD measured using external square wave clock source; all inputs 0.2 V from rail; no dc loads; less than 100 pF
on all outputs. CL = 20 pF on OSC2; all ports configured as inputs; OSC2 capacitance linearly affects wait IDD.
5. STOP IDD measured with OSC1 grounded, no port pins sourcing current. LVI is disabled.
6. Maximum is highest voltage that POR is guaranteed.
7. If minimum VDD is not reached before the internal POR reset is released, RST must be driven low externally until minimum VDD is reached.
8. RPU1 and RPU2 are measured at VDD = 5.0V
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Technical Data
219
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.6.3 Control Timing
Table A-3. Control Timing
Characteristic(1)
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Internal operating frequency(2)
fOP
—
2
MHz
RST input pulse width low(3)
tIRL
1.5
—
µs
NOTES:
1. VDD = 2.2 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH; timing shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted.
2. Some modules may require a minimum frequency greater than dc for proper operation; see appropriate table for this information.
3. Minimum pulse width reset is guaranteed to be recognized. It is possible for a smaller pulse width to cause a reset.
A.6.4 Oscillator Characteristics
Table A-4. Oscillator Component Specifications
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Crystal frequency, XTALCLK
fOSCXCLK
—
—
8
MHz
External clock
reference frequency(1)
fOSCXCLK
dc
—
8
MHz
Crystal load capacitance(2)
CL
—
—
—
Crystal fixed capacitance(2)
C1
—
2 × CL
—
Crystal tuning capacitance(2)
C2
—
2 × CL
—
Feedback bias resistor
RB
—
10 MΩ
—
Series resistor(2), (3)
RS
—
—
—
NOTES:
1. No more than 10% duty cycle deviation from 50%
2. Consult crystal vendor data sheet
3. Not Required for high frequency crystals
Technical Data
220
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MOTOROLA
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.6.5 ADC Characteristics
Table A-5. ADC Characteristics
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Supply voltage
VDDAD
2.2
(VDD min)
5.5
(VDD max)
V
Input voltages
VADIN
VSS
VDD
V
Resolution
BAD
8
8
Bits
Absolute accuracy
AAD
± 0.5
±2
LSB
Includes quantization
ADC internal clock
fADIC
0.5
1.048
MHz
tAIC = 1/fADIC, tested
only at 1 MHz
Conversion range
RAD
VSS
VDD
V
Power-up time
tADPU
14
—
tAIC cycles
Conversion time
tADC
14
15
tAIC cycles
Sample time(1)
tADS
5
—
tAIC cycles
Zero input reading(2)
ZADI
00
01
Hex
VIN = VSS
Full-scale reading(3)
FADI
FE
FF
Hex
VIN = VDD
Input capacitance
CADI
—
(20) 8
pF
Not tested
—
—
±1
µA
Input leakage(3)
Port B/port D
Comments
NOTES:
1. Source impedances greater than 10 kΩ adversely affect internal RC charging time during input sampling.
2. Zero-input/full-scale reading requires sufficient decoupling measures for accurate conversions.
3. The external system error caused by input leakage current is approximately equal to the product of R source and input
current.
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Technical Data
221
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.6.6 Memory Characteristics
The FLASH memory can only be read at an operating voltage of 2.2 to
5.5V. Program and erase are achieved at an operating voltage of 2.7 to
5.5V. The program and erase parameters in Table A-6 are for
VDD = 2.7 to 5.5V only.
Table A-6. Memory Characteristics
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
VRDR
1.3
—
V
—
1
—
MHz
FLASH read bus clock frequency
fRead(1)
32k
8M
Hz
FLASH page erase time
tErase(2)
1
—
ms
FLASH mass erase time
tMErase(3)
4
—
ms
FLASH PGM/ERASE to HVEN set up time
tnvs
10
—
µs
FLASH high-voltage hold time
tnvh
5
—
µs
FLASH high-voltage hold time (mass erase)
tnvhl
100
—
µs
FLASH program hold time
tpgs
5
—
µs
FLASH program time
tPROG
30
40
µs
FLASH return to read time
trcv(4)
1
—
µs
FLASH cumulative program hv period
tHV(5)
—
4
ms
FLASH row erase endurance(6)
—
10k
—
cycles
FLASH row program endurance(7)
—
10k
—
cycles
—
10
—
years
RAM data retention voltage
FLASH program bus clock frequency
(8)
FLASH data retention time
NOTES:
1. fRead is defined as the frequency range for which the FLASH memory can be read.
2. If the page erase time is longer than tErase (Min), there is no erase-disturb, but it reduces the endurance of the
FLASH memory.
3. If the mass erase time is longer than tMErase (Min), there is no erase-disturb, but it reduces the endurance of
the FLASH memory.
4. trcv is defined as the time it needs before the FLASH can be read after turning off the high voltage charge pump,
by clearing HVEN to logic 0.
5. tHV is defined as the cumulative high voltage programming time to the same row before next erase.
tHV must satisfy this condition: tnvs + tnvh + tpgs + (tPROG × 32) ≤ tHV max.
6. The minimum row endurance value specifies each row of the FLASH memory is guaranteed to work for at least
this many erase / program cycles.
7. The minimum row endurance value specifies each row of the FLASH memory is guaranteed to work for at least
this many erase / program cycles.
8. The FLASH is guaranteed to retain data over the entire operating temperature range for at least the minimum
time specified.
Technical Data
222
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MOTOROLA
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
A.7 MC Order Numbers
Table A-7 shows the ordering numbers for the low-voltage devices.
Table A-7. MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E Order Numbers
MC order number
Oscillator type
FLASH memory
Package
MC68HLC98JL3EIFA
Crystal oscillator
4096 Bytes
48-pin LQFP
MC68HLC98JL3EIP
MC68HLC98JL3EIDW
Crystal oscillator
4096 Bytes
28-pin package
MC68HLC98JK3EIP
MC68HLC98JK3EIDW
Crystal oscillator
4096 Bytes
20-pin package
MC68HLC98JK1EIP
MC68HLC98JK1EIDW
Crystal oscillator
1536 Bytes
Notes:
I = 0 °C to +85 °C
P = Plastic dual in-line package (PDIP)
DW = Small outline integrated circuit package (SOIC)
FA = Low-Profile Quad Flat Pack (LQFP)
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MOTOROLA
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Technical Data
223
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
Technical Data
224
MC68H(R)C908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E — Rev. 2.0
MC68HLC908JL3E/JK3E/JK1E
MOTOROLA
HOW TO REACH US:
USA/EUROPE/LOCATIONS NOT LISTED:
Motorola Literature Distribution;
P.O. Box 5405, Denver, Colorado 80217
1-303-675-2140 or 1-800-441-2447
JAPAN:
Motorola Japan Ltd.; SPS, Technical Information Center,
3-20-1, Minami-Azabu Minato-ku, Tokyo 106-8573 Japan
81-3-3440-3569
ASIA/PACIFIC:
Motorola Semiconductors H.K. Ltd.;
Silicon Harbour Centre, 2 Dai King Street,
Tai Po Industrial Estate, Tai Po, N.T., Hong Kong
852-26668334
TECHNICAL INFORMATION CENTER:
Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and software
implementers to use Motorola products. There are no express or implied copyright
licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits or
integrated circuits based on the information in this document.
Motorola reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products
herein. Motorola makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the
1-800-521-6274
suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Motorola assume any
HOME PAGE:
liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically
http://motorola.com/semiconductors
disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental
damages. “Typical” parameters which may be provided in Motorola data sheets
and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual
performance may vary over time. All operating parameters, including “Typicals”
must be validated for each customer application by customer’s technical experts.
Motorola does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of
others. Motorola products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as
components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, or other
applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which
the failure of the Motorola product could create a situation where personal injury or
death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Motorola products for any such
unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Motorola
and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless
against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney fees
arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated
with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Motorola
was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part.
Motorola and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark
Office. digital dna is a trademark of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service
names are the property of their respective owners. Motorola, Inc. is an Equal
Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer.
© Motorola, Inc. 2002
MC68HC908JL3E/D
Rev. 2.0
12/2002